Panasonic FP0H Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Panasonic Manuals
  4. Control Unit
  5. FP0H Series
  6. Programming manual
Panasonic FP0H Programming Manual

Panasonic FP0H Programming Manual

Programmable controller
Hide thumbs Also See for FP0H:
1
2
3
4
Table Of Contents
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091
2024.7
industry.panasonic.com/
Programmable Controller
FP0H Control Unit
Programming Manual

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the FP0H and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Panasonic FP0H

Summary of Contents for Panasonic FP0H

  • Page 1 Programmable Controller FP0H Control Unit Programming Manual WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 2024.7 industry.panasonic.com/...
  • Page 2 (MEMO) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 3: Types Of Manuals

    Types of Manuals ● There are different types of users manuals for the FP0H series. Please refer to a relevant manual for the unit and purpose of your use.
  • Page 4 (MEMO) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents 1 List of Instruction Words..............1-1 1.1 List of Basic Instruction Words............1-2 1.2 List of High-level Instructions ..............1-8 2 Sequence Basic Instructions ...............2-1 2.1 ST, ST/ and OT (Start, Start Not and Out) ..........2-2 2.2 DST, DST/ (Direct start, direct start Not)..........2-4 2.3 DOT (direct out) ..................2-7 2.4 / (Not) ....................2-10 2.5 AN, AN/ (AND, AND Not)..............2-11...
  • Page 6 4.2 JP/LBL (Jump/Label) ................4-7 4.3 LOOP, LBL (Loop, Label)..............4-11 4.4 ED (End) .....................4-15 4.5 CNDE (Conditional End) ..............4-16 4.6 EJECT....................4-18 5 Step ladder Instructions ...............5-1 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End)..................5-2 5.2 SCLR (Clear Multiple Processes) ............5-17 6 Subroutine Instructions ...............6-1 6.1 CALL/SUB/RET (Subroutine Call, Subroutine Entry, Subroutine Return) ....................6-2...
  • Page 7 9.8 ANF=, ANF<>, ANF>, ANF>=, ANF<, ANF<= [Floating point real number data comparison (AND)] ............9-16 9.9 ORF=, ORF<>, ORF>, ORF>=, ORF<, ORF<= [floating point real number data comparison (OR)] ............9-18 10 Transfer Instructions ................10-1 10.1 F0 MV (16-bit Data Transfer) ............10-2 10.2 F0 MV (10 µsec Ring Counter Read) ..........10-4 10.3 F1 DMV (32-bit Data Transfer) ............10-5 10.4 F2 MV/ (16-bit Data Inversion and Transfer) ........10-7...
  • Page 8 11.15 F36 D+1 (32-bit Data Increment) ............11-32 11.16 F37 -1 (16-bit Data Decrement) ............11-34 11.17 F38 D-1 (32-bit Data Decrement)............11-36 11.18 F39 D*D (32-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D]) .....11-38 12 BCD Data Arithmetic Instructions .............12-1 12.1 F40 B+ (4-digit BCD Data Addition [D+S=D]) ........12-2 12.2 F41 DB+ (8-digit BCD Data Addition [D+S=D]) ........12-4 12.3 F42 B+ (4-digit BCD Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) .......12-6 12.4 F43 DB+ (8-digit BCD Data Addition [S1+S2=D])......12-8...
  • Page 9 14.8 F217 DXOR (32-bit Data Exclusive OR)...........14-16 14.9 F218 DXNR (32-bit Data Exclusive NOR) ........14-18 14.10 F219 DUNI [(S1 AND S3) OR (S2 AND S3) = D] (32-bit)....14-20 15 Data Conversion Instructions ............15-1 15.1 F70 BCC [Block Check Code (ADD, SUB, XOR, CRC)]....15-3 15.2 F71 HEXA (Hexadecimal Data to ASCII Code Conversion) .....15-7 15.3 F72 AHEX (ASCII Code to Hexadecimal Data Conversion) .....15-10 15.4 F73 BCDA (BCD Data to ASCII Code Conversion) ......15-14...
  • Page 10 16 Data Shift Instruction................16-1 16.1 F100 SHR (16-bit Data Right Shift)...........16-2 16.2 F101 SHL (16-bit Data Left Shift)............16-4 16.3 F102 DSHR (32-bit Data Right Shift) ..........16-6 16.4 F103 DSHL (32-bit Data Left Shift) ...........16-8 16.5 F105 BSR (16-bit Data 1-Digit Right Shift) ........16-10 16.6 F106 BSL (16-bit Data 1-Digit Left Shift) ..........16-12 16.7 F108 BITR (Block Area Bitwise Right Shift)........16-14 16.8 F109 BITL (Block Area Bitwise Left Shift).........16-16...
  • Page 11 20.1 F138 HMSS (Hour, Minute, Second Data to Second Data Conversion)...................20-2 20.2 F139 SHMS (Second Data to Hour, Minute, Second Data Conversion)...................20-4 20.3 F140 STC (Cy Flag Set) ..............20-6 20.4 F141 CLC (Cy Flag Clear) ..............20-7 20.5 F143 IORF (Partial I/O refresh)............20-8 20.6 F147 PR (Printout) ................20-9 20.7 F148 ERR (Self-Diagnostic Error Set) ..........20-14 20.8 F149 MSG (Character Send to Programming Tool)......20-16...
  • Page 12 22.7 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MODBUS Master: No Function Code Specification)] ...............22-17 22.8 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MC Protocol Master)] ....22-20 22.9 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MC Protocol Master)] ..22-23 22.10 F159 MTRN (General-purpose Communication Instruction) ..22-26 23 Sampling Trace Instructions ..............23-1 23.1 Sampling Trace.................23-2 23.2 F155 SMPL (Sample Set Data) ............23-3...
  • Page 13 26 Data Manipulation Instructions ............26-1 26.1 F270 MAX (Search Maximum Value from 16-bit Data Block) ...26-2 26.2 F271 DMAX (Search Maximum Value from 32-bit Data Block) ..26-4 26.3 F272 MIN (Search Minimum Value from 16-bit Data Block) .....26-6 26.4 F273 DMIN (Search Minimum Value from 32-bit Data Block)...26-8 26.5 F275 MEAN (16-bit Data Sum and Average)........26-10 26.6 F276 DMEAN (32-bit Data Sum and Average) .........26-12 26.7 F277 SORT (16-bit Data Block Sort) ..........26-14...
  • Page 14 27.20 F328 DINT [Floating Point Data to 32-bit Integer Conversion (Largest Integer Not Exceeding the Floating-point Data)].....27-40 27.21 F329 FIX [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round-down)] ..................27-42 27.22 F330 DFIX [Floating Point Data to 32-bit Integer Conversion (Round-down)] ..................27-44 27.23 F331 ROFF [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round-off)] ...................27-46 27.24 F332 DROFF [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion...
  • Page 15 33.15 F439 CFREEK (SD Memory Card Free Space Acquisition: Kilobyte Units) ..................33-60 33.16 F440 CFLS (File status acquisition)..........33-62 33.17 F441 PanaSD (Read of lifetime information of Panasonic SD card) ......................33-65 34 Ethernet Instructions ................34-1 34.1 F460 IPv4SET (Ipv4 Address Setting) ..........34-2 34.2 F461 CONSET (Connection Setting) ..........34-7...
  • Page 16 35 EtherNet/IP Instructions ..............35-1 35.1 F465 ETSTAT (EtherNet/IP Information Acquisition) ......35-2 35.2 F490 EIPNDST (EtherNet/IP node status acquisition instruction) ..35-9 35.3 F495 EIPMSATT (EIP message destination settings) ......35-13 35.4 F496 EIPMBODY (EIP message body setting).........35-16 35.5 F497 EIPMSEND (EIP message sending)........35-19 35.6 F498 CIPMSET [CIP message data generation (combination)] ..35-23 35.7 F499 CIPMGET (data acquisition from CIP message) .....35-28 35.8 CIP Status Codes ................35-34...
  • Page 17 38.5.4 When Using High-speed Counter Function ........38-57 38.6 FPsigma Mode..................38-59 38.6.1 Overview of FPsigma Mode ............38-59 38.6.2 Converting Projects for FPsigma to Projects for FP0H (FPsigma Mode)....................38-60 38.6.3 Converting Projects for FP0H (FPsigma Mode) to Projects for FP0H (FP0H Mode) ................
  • Page 18 38.13 BIN/HEX/BCD Code Correspondence Table ........38-103 38.14 ASCII Code Table, JIS8 Code Table ..........38-104 xviii WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 19: List Of Instruction Words

    1 List of Instruction Words 1.1 List of Basic Instruction Words............1-2 1.2 List of High-level Instructions ..............1-8 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 20: List Of Basic Instruction Words

    1.1 List of Basic Instruction Words 1.1 List of Basic Instruction Words ■ Sequence basic instructions Referen Mnemonic Name Steps page: Begins a logic operation with a Form A (normally open) 1 (2) "P.2-2" (Note 1) contact Begins a logic operation with a Form A (normally open) contact: "P.2-4"...

  • Page 21: Basic Function Instructions

    1.1 List of Basic Instruction Words Referen Mnemonic Name Steps page: POPS Reads and clears the operation result stored by PSHS "P.2-29" Rise detection "P.2-33" Fall detection "P.2-33" Rise detection (possible on the first scan) "P.2-38" (Note 1) "P.2-40" Turns ON the output and holds it ON DSET (Note 1) "P.2-43"...
  • Page 22 1.1 List of Basic Instruction Words ■ Control instructions Referen Mnemonic Name Steps page: Master control relay "P.4-2" Master control relay end "P.4-2" Jumps to specified label "P.4-7" LOOP Jumps to the specified label the number of times specified by D "P.4-11"...
  • Page 23 1.1 List of Basic Instruction Words Referen Mnemonic Name Steps page: ICTL Interrupt control specification "P.7-8" ■ Program block control instructions Referen Mnemonic Name Steps page: (Note 1) Final point of PBn program EDPB (Note 1) Cannot be input with a programming tool. ■...
  • Page 24 1.1 List of Basic Instruction Words Referen Mnemonic Name Steps page: OR> 16-bit data compare parallel connection "P.9-6" OR>= 16-bit data compare parallel connection "P.9-6" OR< 16-bit data compare parallel connection "P.9-6" OR<= 16-bit data compare parallel connection "P.9-6" STD= Begins a logical operation to compare 32-bit data "P.9-8"...
  • Page 25 1.1 List of Basic Instruction Words Referen Mnemonic Name Steps page: ANF= Single-precision floating point data compare serial connection "P.9-16" ANF<> Single-precision floating point data compare serial connection "P.9-16" ANF> Single-precision floating point data compare serial connection "P.9-16" ANF>= Single-precision floating point data compare serial connection "P.9-16"...

  • Page 26: List Of High-Level Instructions

    1.2 List of High-level Instructions 1.2 List of High-level Instructions ■ Transfer instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. S, D 16-bit data transfer 10-2" "P. DT90020, D 10 µs ring counter read 10-4" "P. S, D 32-bit data transfer 10-5"...
  • Page 27 1.2 List of High-level Instructions ■ Binary arithmetic instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. S, D 16-bit data addition [D+S=D] 11-2" "P. S, D 32-bit data addition [D+S=D] 11-4" "P. S1, S2, D 16-bit data addition [S1+S2=D] 11-6"...
  • Page 28 1.2 List of High-level Instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. S, D 8-digit BCD data addition [D+S=D] 12-4" "P. S1, S2, D 4-digit BCD data addition [S1+S2=D] 12-6" "P. S1, S2, D 8-digit BCD data addition [S1+S2=D] 12-8"...
  • Page 29 1.2 List of High-level Instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. F373 S, D 16-bit data revision detection 13-19" "P. F374 DDTR S, D 32-bit data revision detection 13-21" ■ Boolean instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page:...
  • Page 30 1.2 List of High-level Instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. BINA S1, S2, D Convert 16-bit binary data to ASCII code 15-22" "P. ABIN S1, S2, D Convert ASCII code to 16-bit binary data 15-25" "P. DBIA S1, S2, D Convert 32-bit binary data to ASCII code...
  • Page 31 1.2 List of High-level Instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. F231 SECTM S, D Second to time conversion 15-69" "P. F235 S, D 16-bit data to gray code conversion 15-72" "P. F236 DGRY S, D 32-bit data to gray code conversion 15-73"...
  • Page 32 1.2 List of High-level Instructions ■ Data rotation instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. F120 D, n 16-bit data right rotation 17-2" "P. F121 D, n 16-bit data left rotation 17-4" "P. F122 D, n 16-bit data right rotation with carry 17-6"...
  • Page 33 1.2 List of High-level Instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. F133 S, n Specified bit test 19-8" "P. F135 S, D Count ON bits in 16-bit data 19-10" "P. F136 DBCU S, D Count ON bits in 32-bit data 19-12"...
  • Page 34 1.2 List of High-level Instructions Reference Fun no. Mnemonic Operand Name Step page Data send instruction [MODBUS master: F145 SEND S1, S2, D, N "P.21-12" Function code specification] Data receive instruction [MODBUS master: F146 RECV S1, S2, N, D "P.21-17" Function code specification] Data send instruction [MODBUS master: No F145...
  • Page 35 1.2 List of High-level Instructions Reference Fun no. Mnemonic Operand Name Step page Target value match OFF (with channel F167 HC1R n, S, D "P.24-10" specification)) ■ High-speed counter cam control instruction Reference Fun no. Mnemonic Operand Name Step page F165 CAM0 Cam control...
  • Page 36 1.2 List of High-level Instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. F263 MIDR S1, S2, S3, D Read from any position in character string 25-50" "P. F264 MIDW S1, S2, S3, D Write to any position in character string 25-52"...
  • Page 37 1.2 List of High-level Instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. F289 ZONE S1, S2, S3, D 16-bit data zone control 26-34" "P. F290 DZONE S1, S2, S3, D 32-bit data zone control 26-36" ■ Floating-point instruction Refere Fun no.
  • Page 38 1.2 List of High-level Instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: Convert to largest 16-bit integer that does not "P. F327 S, D exceed floating point data 27-38" Convert to largest 32-bit integer that does not "P. F328 DINT S, D exceed floating point data...
  • Page 39 1.2 List of High-level Instructions ■ Process control instructions Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. F355 PID operation 29-2" "P. F356 EZPID S1, S2, S3, S4 PID operation: PWM output possible 29-9" ■ Positioning control instructions (Table setting mode) Refere Fun no.
  • Page 40 S, D File status acquisition 6-262 33-62" "P. F441 PanaSD D1, D2, D3 Panasonic SD card lifetime information read 33-65" (Note 1) For instructions F427/F428/F429/F430/F431/F432/F433/F434/F435/F436/F437/F440, the number of steps varies depending on the contents specified in the operand. 1-22 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 41 1.2 List of High-level Instructions ■ Ethernet communication instructions (C32ET only) Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operands Name Steps page: "P. F460 IPv4SET Ipv4 address setting 4-260 34-2" "P. F461 CONSET S1, S2, D1, D2 Connection setting 10-522 34-7" "P. F462 OPEN Connection open 34-14"...
  • Page 42 1.2 List of High-level Instructions (Note 2) The F490/F495/F496/F497/F498/F499 instructions can be used with the unit firmware Ver. 1.8 or later. ■ FTP instruction (C32ET only) Refere Fun no. Mnemonic Operand Name Step page: "P. F465 ETSTAT S1, S2, D EtherNet/IP information acquisition: FTP 8-520 36-2"...

  • Page 43: Sequence Basic Instructions

    2 Sequence Basic Instructions 2.1 ST, ST/ and OT (Start, Start Not and Out) ..........2-2 2.2 DST, DST/ (Direct start, direct start Not)..........2-4 2.3 DOT (direct out) ..................2-7 2.4 / (Not) ....................2-10 2.5 AN, AN/ (AND, AND Not)..............2-11 2.6 DAN, DAN/ (Direct AND, Direct AND NOT)........2-13 2.7 OR, OR/ (OR, OR Not) ...............2-16 2.8 DOR, DOR/ (Direct OR, Direct OR Not) ..........2-18 2.9 ST↑, ST↓, AN↑, AN↓, OR↑, OR↓...

  • Page 44: St, St/ And Ot (Start, Start Not And Out)

    2.1 ST, ST/ and OT (Start, Start Not and Out) 2.1 ST, ST/ and OT (Start, Start Not and Out) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Input contact starting logical operation as Form A (normally open) Input contact starting logical operation as Form B (normally closed) Coil that outputs logical operation ■...
  • Page 45 2.1 ST, ST/ and OT (Start, Start Not and Out) ■ Precautions for programming ● ST instructions begin from the bus bar. (This is the same for ST/ instructions) ● OT instructions cannot begin directly from the bus bar. ● OT instructions can be used consecutively. ●...

  • Page 46: Dst, Dst/ (Direct Start, Direct Start Not)

    2.2 DST, DST/ (Direct start, direct start Not) 2.2 DST, DST/ (Direct start, direct start Not) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Input contact starting logical operation as Form A (normally open) DST/ Input contact starting logical operation as Form B (normally closed) ■...
  • Page 47 2.2 DST, DST/ (Direct start, direct start Not) Ladder diagram ● Timing chart ● *Main unit input constant setting: None n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan External input ST X0 execution <For DST instruction> Ladder diagram ● Timing chart ● *Main unit input constant setting: None WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 48 2.2 DST, DST/ (Direct start, direct start Not) n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan DST X0 execution WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 49: Operation Example

    2.3 DOT (direct out) 2.3 DOT (direct out) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Coil that outputs logical operation ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Operands Index modifier ● ● ■ Outline of operation Instru Operation ction...
  • Page 50 2.3 DOT (direct out) Ladder diagram ● Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan OT Y0 execution <DOT instruction> Ladder diagram ● WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 51 2.3 DOT (direct out) Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan DOT Y0 execution WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 52: (Not)

    2.4 / (Not) 2.4 / (Not) ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation ● The NOT instruction inverts the operation result up to immediately before this instruction. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program ● When X0 turns ON, Y10 turns ON and Y11 turns OFF. ●...

  • Page 53: An, An/ (And, And Not)

    2.5 AN, AN/ (AND, AND Not) 2.5 AN, AN/ (AND, AND Not) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Form A (normally open) contacts connected in series Form B (normally closed) contacts connected in series ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Operands Index modifier ●...
  • Page 54 2.5 AN, AN/ (AND, AND Not) ● The AN and AN/ instructions can be used consecutively. 2-12 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 55: Dan, Dan/ (Direct And, Direct And Not)

    2.6 DAN, DAN/ (Direct AND, Direct AND NOT) 2.6 DAN, DAN/ (Direct AND, Direct AND NOT) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Form A (normally open) contacts connected in series DAN/ Form B (normally closed) contacts connected in series ■...
  • Page 56 2.6 DAN, DAN/ (Direct AND, Direct AND NOT) Ladder diagram ● Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan AN X0 execution <For DAN instruction> Ladder diagram ● 2-14 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 57 2.6 DAN, DAN/ (Direct AND, Direct AND NOT) Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan DAN X0 execution WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 2-15...

  • Page 58: Or, Or/ (Or, Or Not)

    2.7 OR, OR/ (OR, OR Not) 2.7 OR, OR/ (OR, OR Not) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Form A (normally open) contact connected in parallel Form B (normally closed) contact connected in parallel ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Operands Index modifier ●...
  • Page 59 2.7 OR, OR/ (OR, OR Not) ■ Precautions for programming ● Use the OR instruction when Form A (normally open) contacts are connected in parallel. ● Use the OR/ instruction when Form B (normally closed) contacts are connected in parallel. ●...

  • Page 60: Dor, Dor/ (Direct Or, Direct Or Not)

    2.8 DOR, DOR/ (Direct OR, Direct OR Not) 2.8 DOR, DOR/ (Direct OR, Direct OR Not) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Form A (normally open) contact connected in parallel DOR/ Form B (normally closed) contact connected in parallel ■...
  • Page 61 2.8 DOR, DOR/ (Direct OR, Direct OR Not) ■ Comparing the OR instruction and DOR instruction ● A quicker response is possible with a DOR instruction than with an OR instruction. <OR instruction> Ladder diagram ● Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan OR X0 execution...
  • Page 62 2.8 DOR, DOR/ (Direct OR, Direct OR Not) Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan DOR X0 execution 2-20 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 63: St↑, St↓, An↑, An↓, Or↑, Or↓ (Rise Detection, Fall Detection)

    2.9 ST↑, ST↓, AN↑, AN↓, OR↑, OR↓ (Rise Detection, Fall Detection) 2.9 ST↑, ST↓, AN↑, AN↓, OR↑, OR↓ (Rise Detection, Fall Detection) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instruction Description ST↑, ST↓ Input contact that starts a logical operation at the rise or fall of a signal AN↑, AN↓...
  • Page 64 2.9 ST↑, ST↓, AN↑, AN↓, OR↑, OR↓ (Rise Detection, Fall Detection) 1 scan 1 scan Rising edge Rising edge 2. Output to Y11 takes place for 1 scan only following the change of X2 from the OFF to ON state (rise) when X1 is ON. 1 scan 3.

  • Page 65: Alt (Alternate Out)

    2.10 ALT (Alternate Out) 2.10 ALT (Alternate Out) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Coil that controls flip-flops ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Operands Index modifier ● ● ● ■ Outline of operation ●...
  • Page 66 2.10 ALT (Alternate Out) ● Be aware that, if used with instructions that change the order of execution such as the MC to MCE instructions or the JP to LBL instructions (see 1 to 6 below), the operation of instructions may change depending on the timing of instruction execution and input. 1.

  • Page 67: Ans (And Stack)

    2.11 ANS (And Stack) 2.11 ANS (And Stack) ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation ● Blocks that were connected in parallel are connected in series. Blocks stack in series ● The start of each block begins with an ST instruction. ■...
  • Page 68 2.11 ANS (And Stack) ■ When blocks are consecutive When blocks are consecutive, consider a block division as follows. Block 5 Block 4 Block 1 Block 3 Block 2 ST X OR X ST X OR X ANS････････････(1) ST X OR X ANS････････････(2) 2-26...

  • Page 69: Ors (Or Stack)

    2.12 ORS (OR Stack) 2.12 ORS (OR Stack) ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation ● Serially connected blocks are connected in parallel. Blocks stack in parallel ● The start of each block begins with an ST instruction. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When both X0 and X1 turn ON, or when both X2 and X3 turn ON, the result is output to Y10.
  • Page 70 2.12 ORS (OR Stack) ■ When blocks are consecutive When blocks are consecutive, consider a block division as follows. Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Block 4 Block 5 Block 1 Block 4 Block 2 Block 5 Block 3 2-28 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 71: Pshs, Rds, Pops (Push Stack, Read Stack, Pop Stack)

    2.13 PSHS, RDS, POPS (Push stack, Read stack, Pop stack) 2.13 PSHS, RDS, POPS (Push stack, Read stack, Pop stack) ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation These instructions can be used to store one operation result, read it, and perform multiple processes on it.

  • Page 72: Programming Precautions

    2.13 PSHS, RDS, POPS (Push stack, Read stack, Pop stack) ■ Programming precautions ● Use the RDS instruction when continuing to use the operation result, and use the POPS instruction when finishing. (The POPS instruction must be included.) ● The RDS instruction may be used consecutively as many times as required. 2-30 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 73 2.13 PSHS, RDS, POPS (Push stack, Read stack, Pop stack) ■ Precautions when using thePSHSinstruction consecutively ● The PSHS instruction is limited to a maximum of eight consecutive uses. ● Please note that the program will not run correctly if this limit is exceeded. ST X 0 PSHS …(1) AN X 1...
  • Page 74 2.13 PSHS, RDS, POPS (Push stack, Read stack, Pop stack) <Continues from above program> POPS…Reads (5) AN X 6 OT Y 11 POPS…Reads (4) AN X 7 OT Y 12 POPS…Reads (3) AN X 8 OT Y 13 2-32 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 75: Df, Df/ (Rise Differential,Fall Differential)

    2.14 DF, DF/ (Rise Differential,Fall Differential) 2.14 DF, DF/ (Rise Differential,Fall Differential) ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation Instruction Operation When an execution condition changes from OFF to ON (rise), outputs only that 1 scan (differential output). When an execution condition changes from ON to OFF (fall), outputs only that 1 scan (differential output).

  • Page 76: Related Instructions

    2.14 DF, DF/ (Rise Differential,Fall Differential) 1 scan 1 scan Rising edge Falling edge ■ Related instructions ● The DFI instruction can be used. Only the first 1 scan is executed. ■ Programming precautions ● For the circuit shown below, the operation is as follows. When X1 is OFF, Y10 remains OFF even if X0 rises.
  • Page 77 2.14 DF, DF/ (Rise Differential,Fall Differential) R9014 turns ON from the second scan after RUN begins. ● Caution is required when using differential instructions in combination with instructions that change the order of execution of instructions (1 to 6 below), such as the MC/MCE instructions or the JP/LBL instructions.
  • Page 78 2.14 DF, DF/ (Rise Differential,Fall Differential) <Time chart> ■ Examples of applying differential instructions ● Using differential instructions makes it easy to create and adjust programs. <Example of application to a self-holding circuit> ● Using a differential instruction allows longer input signals to be supported. Y10’...
  • Page 79 2.14 DF, DF/ (Rise Differential,Fall Differential) <Example 1> <Example 2> WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 2-37...

  • Page 80: Dfi [Rise Differential (Initial Execution Type)]

    2.15 DFI [Rise Differential (initial execution type)] 2.15 DFI [Rise Differential (initial execution type)] ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation Instruction Operation When an execution condition changes from OFF to ON (rise), outputs only that one scan (differential output). ●...
  • Page 81 2.15 DFI [Rise Differential (initial execution type)] ● Caution is required when using differential instructions in combination with instructions that change the order of execution of instructions (1 to 6 below), such as the MC/MCE instructions or the JP/LBL instructions. 1.

  • Page 82: Set, Rst (Set, Reset)

    2.16 SET, RST (Set, Reset) 2.16 SET, RST (Set, Reset) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Output coil Output coil ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Operands Index modifier ● ● ● ● ● ●...
  • Page 83 2.16 SET, RST (Set, Reset) ■ Processing mechanisms when the SET and RST instructions are used ● The output content is overwritten with each step during processing of the operation. e.g. Processing when X0, X1, and X2 are all turned ON ●...
  • Page 84 2.16 SET, RST (Set, Reset) ● The output destination of a SET instruction is reset when switching from "RUN" to "PROG. mode" and when the power is turned OFF. (However, if an internal relay set as a hold type is specified as the output destination, reset does not take place.) ■...

  • Page 85: Dset/Drst (Direct Set/Direct Reset)

    2.17 DSET/DRST (Direct Set/Direct Reset) 2.17 DSET/DRST (Direct Set/Direct Reset) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction List Instruct Description DSET Output coil DRST Output coil ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Operands Index modifier DSET ● ● DRST ●...
  • Page 86 2.17 DSET/DRST (Direct Set/Direct Reset) ■ Comparison of SET instructions and DSET instructions ● Compared to SET instructions, DSET instructions are capable of high-speed responses. <SET instruction> Ladder diagram ● Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan SET Y0 execution <DSET instruction>...
  • Page 87 2.17 DSET/DRST (Direct Set/Direct Reset) Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan DSET Y0 execution ■ Comparison of RST instructions and DRST instructions ● Compared to RST instructions, DRST instructions are capable of high-speed responses. <RST instruction> ● Ladder diagram Timing chart ●...
  • Page 88 2.17 DSET/DRST (Direct Set/Direct Reset) Ladder diagram ● Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan DRST Y0 execution 2-46 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 89: Kp (Keep)

    2.18 KP (Keep) 2.18 KP (Keep) ■ Instruction format Set input Reset input ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Output coil ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Operands Index modifier ● ● ● ■ Outline of operation ●...
  • Page 90 2.18 KP (Keep) ■ Precautions for programming ● The state of the output destination is held even during operation of the MC instruction. ● The output is reset when switching from"RUN mode"to"PROG. mode"and when the power is turned OFF. (However, if an internal relay set as a hold type is specified as the output destination, reset does not take place.) 2-48 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 91: Dkp (Direct Keep)

    2.19 DKP (Direct Keep) 2.19 DKP (Direct Keep) ■ Instruction format Set input Reset input ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Output coil ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Operands Index modifier ● ■ Outline of operation ●...
  • Page 92 2.19 DKP (Direct Keep) Ladder diagram ● Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan KP Y0 execution <DKP instruction> Ladder diagram ● 2-50 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 93 2.19 DKP (Direct Keep) Timing chart ● n-1 scan n scan n+1 scan DKP Y0 execution WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 2-51...

  • Page 94: Nop

    2.20 NOP 2.20 NOP ■ Instruction format 1 NOP count ■ Outline of operation ● This instruction has no effect on the operation results to that point. The same operation is performed even without a NOP instruction. ● A NOP instruction can be used to make the program easier to read when checking or correcting.

  • Page 95: Basic Function Instructions

    3 Basic Function Instructions 3.1 TML/TMR/TMX/TMY (0.001 s, 0.01 s, 0.1 s, 1 s On-delay Timer) ..3-2 3.2 F137 STMR (16-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer)........3-9 3.3 F183 DSTM (32-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer)........3-12 3.4 CT [Counter (Preset Subtraction Expression)]........3-16 3.5 F118 UDC (Up/Down Counter) ............3-23 3.6 SR (Shift Register) ................3-26 3.7 F119 LRSR (Left/Right Shift Register) ..........3-29 3.8 F182 FILTR (Time Literal Process) .............3-32...

  • Page 96: Tml/Tmr/Tmx/Tmy (0.001 S, 0.01 S, 0.1 S, 1 S On-Delay Timer)

    3.1 TML/TMR/TMX/TMY (0.001 s, 0.01 s, 0.1 s, 1 s On-delay Timer) 3.1 TML/TMR/TMX/TMY (0.001 s, 0.01 s, 0.1 s, 1 s On-delay Timer) ■ Instruction format Timer number Timer units Execution conditions TML5 K300 Set value Timer no. 5 timer contact ■...
  • Page 97 3.1 TML/TMR/TMX/TMY (0.001 s, 0.01 s, 0.1 s, 1 s On-delay Timer) ■ Precautions for programming ● As subtraction operations are performed during operation, create the program so that it operates once during one scan. If an operation is performed more than once during one scan or cannot be performed even once due to an interrupt processing program or jump/loop instruction, correct results cannot be obtained.
  • Page 98 3.1 TML/TMR/TMX/TMY (0.001 s, 0.01 s, 0.1 s, 1 s On-delay Timer) ■ Examples of timer instruction application <Timer series connection> Ladder diagram ● Timing chart ● 3 seconds 2 seconds <Timer parallel connection> Ladder diagram ● WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 99: Timing Chart

    3.1 TML/TMR/TMX/TMY (0.001 s, 0.01 s, 0.1 s, 1 s On-delay Timer) Timing chart ● 3 seconds 2 seconds ■ How to directly specify the set value area No. for the timer set value ● The set value area number can be specified directly as the set value [n]. The above program in which SV5 is specified as the set value operates as follows.
  • Page 100 3.1 TML/TMR/TMX/TMY (0.001 s, 0.01 s, 0.1 s, 1 s On-delay Timer) If the SV value was changed while in RUN mode and that value is to be used as a set value without being reset the next time the power supply is turned on or when switching from "PROG.

  • Page 101: Control Unit

    3.1 TML/TMR/TMX/TMY (0.001 s, 0.01 s, 0.1 s, 1 s On-delay Timer) Ladder diagram ● Timing chart ● 5 seconds 3 seconds Example 2) Setting a set value from external digital switches The BCD data of the digital switches connected to X0 through XF is converted and becomes the set value.
  • Page 102 3.1 TML/TMR/TMX/TMY (0.001 s, 0.01 s, 0.1 s, 1 s On-delay Timer) Ladder diagram ● WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 103: F137 Stmr (16-Bit, 0.01 S On-Delay Timer)

    3.2 F137 STMR (16-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer) 3.2 F137 STMR (16-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Area storing the setting value, or constant data Process value area ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 104 3.2 F137 STMR (16-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer) ■ Setting the timer period 1. The timer period is 0.01 × [timer set value]. 2. The timer set value is set with a K constant within the range of K1 to K32767. "STMR"...
  • Page 105 3.2 F137 STMR (16-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer) DT20 F137 STMR DT10 DT20 R900D F0 MV DT30 DT40 (3) Subtraction operation complete ■ Precautions when using R900D When using multiple auxiliary timers with R900D, ensure that R900D is used on the line after the auxiliary timer instruction.

  • Page 106: F183 Dstm (32-Bit, 0.01 S On-Delay Timer)

    3.3 F183 DSTM (32-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer) 3.3 F183 DSTM (32-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Area storing the setting value, or constant data Process value area ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 107 3.3 F183 DSTM (32-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer) ■ Setting the timer period 1. The timer period is 0.01 × [timer set value]. 2. The timer set value is set as a K constant in the range of K1 to K2147483647. 0.01 to 21474836.47 seconds in units of 0.01 second.
  • Page 108 3.3 F183 DSTM (32-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer) F183 DSTM K500 K500 R900D F0 MV DT50 WR50 (3) Addition operation complete Process value (D, D+1) (R900D) ■ Precautions when using R900D When using multiple auxiliary timers with R900D, ensure that R900D is used on the line after the auxiliary timer instruction.
  • Page 109 3.3 F183 DSTM (32-bit, 0.01 s On-delay Timer) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 3-15...

  • Page 110: Ct [Counter (Preset Subtraction Expression)]

    3.4 CT [Counter (Preset Subtraction Expression)] 3.4 CT [Counter (Preset Subtraction Expression)] ■ Instruction format Count number Count input CT100 Set value Reset input C100 ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Counter set value ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 111 3.4 CT [Counter (Preset Subtraction Expression)] 10 times C100 ■ Setting the count value The count value can be set to a decimal constant (K constant) in a setting range from K0 to K32767. ■ Counter operation The following are examples of specifying a K constant as the set value. For an explanation of operations when a set value area number is specified, see"P.3-19".
  • Page 112 3.4 CT [Counter (Preset Subtraction Expression)] 4. When the value in the elapsed value area "EV" reaches zero, the counter contact "C" with the same number turns ON. SV100 EV100 CT100 (4) Subtraction operation end C100 ■ Precautions for programming When combining a counter instruction with an AND stack instruction or POP stack instruction, be careful that the programming is correct.

  • Page 113: Related Instructions

    3.4 CT [Counter (Preset Subtraction Expression)] ■ Related instructions ● Counter instructions also include an up/down counter instruction (F118 UDC). ● An increment instruction (F35+1) can be used to provide the same type of function. ■ Directly specifying a set value area number as a counter set value The set value area number can be specified directly as the set value [n].
  • Page 114 3.4 CT [Counter (Preset Subtraction Expression)] F0 MV SV100 SV100 CT100 (1) Transfer to SV area SV100 C100 2. When the reset input falls, the value in the set value area "SV" is preset in the elapsed value area "EV" . SV100 EV100 CT100...
  • Page 115 3.4 CT [Counter (Preset Subtraction Expression)] SV100 EV100 CT100 (4) Subtraction operation end SV100 C100 ■ Examples of applying direct specification of set value area numbers Example 1) Changing set values based on specified conditions The set value is K50 when X0 is ON and K30 when X1 is ON. Ladder diagram ●...

  • Page 116: Connection Example

    3.4 CT [Counter (Preset Subtraction Expression)] 50 times C100 SV100 Example 2) Setting a set value from external digital switches The BCD data of the digital switches connected to X0 through XF is converted and becomes the set value. Connection example ●...

  • Page 117: F118 Udc (Up/Down Counter)

    3.5 F118 UDC (Up/Down Counter) 3.5 F118 UDC (Up/Down Counter) ■ Instruction format Up/down input F118 UDC Count input (Preset value) DT10 Reset input (Process value) ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Area storing preset values, or constant data Up/down counter elapsed value area ■...

  • Page 118: Operation Example

    3.5 F118 UDC (Up/Down Counter) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program The program on the previous page is an example in which the default value is set, and external output Y50 turns ON when target value is 0. This can be used, for example, in programs such as those that cause an indicator lamp to light when the work being added or subtracted reaches a certain quantity.
  • Page 119 3.5 F118 UDC (Up/Down Counter) ● Counting is only performed at the rise, so even if the count input remains on, no further counting will occur. ● When switching to RUN or when powering on in "RUN mode" , if the count input is ON from the beginning, increment/decrement is not carried out for the first scan.

  • Page 120: Sr (Shift Register)

    3.6 SR (Shift Register) 3.6 SR (Shift Register) ■ Instruction format Data input SR WR3 Shift input Reset input ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Specified register ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand Index WX WY WR WL SV modifier Device...
  • Page 121 3.6 SR (Shift Register) 3. When reset input is ON, the content of the specified register is cleared. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program 1. If X1 turns ON when X2 is in an OFF state, the content of WR3 (internal relays R30 to R3F) is shifted one bit to the left.
  • Page 122 3.6 SR (Shift Register) Shift input Reset input Reset input has priority ● Note that when a hold type memory area is specified for the shift register, an automatic reset is not performed when the power supply is turned ON. ●...

  • Page 123: Instruction Format

    3.7 F119 LRSR (Left/Right Shift Register) 3.7 F119 LRSR (Left/Right Shift Register) ■ Instruction format Left/right shift input (ON: Left, OFF: Right) F119 LRSR Data input Shift input Reset input ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Starting number of area to be shifted End number of area to be shifted ■...
  • Page 124 3.7 F119 LRSR (Left/Right Shift Register) Also, the bit extracted by the shift (the most significant bit for a shift to the left, and the least significant bit for a shift to the right) will be set for the special internal relay R9009 (carry flag).
  • Page 125 3.7 F119 LRSR (Left/Right Shift Register) ● In cases where the shift input is initially ON, such as when the mode is switched to RUN or when the power is turned on when in "RUN mode" , a shift will not take place at the first scan.

  • Page 126: F182 Filtr (Time Literal Process)

    3.8 F182 FILTR (Time Literal Process) 3.8 F182 FILTR (Time Literal Process) ■ Instruction format ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Area storing the 16-bit data that is filter processing target Area storing the filter processing target bits, or constant data Area storing the filter processing time, or constant data Area storing the filter processing result ■...
  • Page 127 3.8 F182 FILTR (Time Literal Process) ■ Precautions for programming ● When the execution condition rises, all input bits specified by S1 are directly output unconditionally. ● It is possible that an error of up to one scan may occur in the filter processing time. ■...
  • Page 128 (MEMO) 3-34 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 129: Control Instructions

    4 Control Instructions 4.1 MC/MCE (Master Control Relay / Master Control Relay End) ....4-2 4.2 JP/LBL (Jump/Label) ................4-7 4.3 LOOP, LBL (Loop, Label)..............4-11 4.4 ED (End) .....................4-15 4.5 CNDE (Conditional End) ..............4-16 4.6 EJECT....................4-18 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 130: Mc/Mce (Master Control Relay / Master Control Relay End)

    4.1 MC/MCE (Master Control Relay / Master Control Relay End) 4.1 MC/MCE (Master Control Relay / Master Control Relay End) ■ Instruction format Master control relay number Execution conditions MC 1 Master control relay number MCE 1 ■ Outline of operation ●...
  • Page 131 4.1 MC/MCE (Master Control Relay / Master Control Relay End) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program 1. Executes the process between the MC1 and MCE1 instructions while the execution condition is ON. 2. If the execution condition is OFF, the process between the MC1 and MCE1 instructions is not executed and output is turned OFF.
  • Page 132 4.1 MC/MCE (Master Control Relay / Master Control Relay End) Timing chart 1 Timing chart 2 ● Output will not be obtained if the same execution condition is specified for an MC instruction and a differential instruction. If output is needed, enter the differential instruction outside of the MC-MCE instruction sequence.
  • Page 133 4.1 MC/MCE (Master Control Relay / Master Control Relay End) ■ Precautions for programming ● A second MC-MCE instruction pair can be entered (nested) between an initial MC-MCE instruction pair. (There is no limit to the number of nestings.) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 134 4.1 MC/MCE (Master Control Relay / Master Control Relay End) ● The program cannot be executed in the following cases. 1. Either MC or MCE is missing. 2. The order of MC and MCE is reversed. 3. There is duplicated use of the specified number. MC 0 Duplicates used MC 0...

  • Page 135: Jp/Lbl (Jump/Label)

    4.2 JP/LBL (Jump/Label) 4.2 JP/LBL (Jump/Label) ■ Instruction format JP 1 Label number LBL 1 ■ Outline of operation ● When the execution condition turns ON, the program jumps to the label (LBL instruction) with the same number as the specified number. ●...
  • Page 136 4.2 JP/LBL (Jump/Label) ● 2 or more LBL instructions with the same number cannot be written in the same program. ● If the jump destination label is not programmed, a syntax error occurs. ● Caution is required when using an instruction that is executed by detecting the rise of an execution condition, such as a differential instruction (1 to 7 below).

  • Page 137: Timing Chart

    4.2 JP/LBL (Jump/Label) (3) SR Even if shift input is ON, no shift is performed. The contents of the specified register are instruction retained. ● If the LBL instruction is at an address before the JP instruction, then processing of each instruction when executing the JP instruction will be as follows.
  • Page 138 4.2 JP/LBL (Jump/Label) Timing chart 2 ● When the execution conditions for the JP instruction are the same as the execution conditions for the differential instruction, the leading edge (or trailing edge) of the execution condition for the differential instruction will not be detected. If differential output is required, write the differential instruction outside of the area between the JP and LBL instructions.

  • Page 139: Loop, Lbl (Loop, Label)

    4.3 LOOP, LBL (Loop, Label) 4.3 LOOP, LBL (Loop, Label) ■ Instruction format F0 MV Label number LBL 1 Label number Loop count LOOP 1 ■ Instruction list Instru Description ction Area storing number of loop operations ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 140 4.3 LOOP, LBL (Loop, Label) F0 MV LBL 1 LOOP 1 If DT0=K5, then after 5 jumps, there are no more jumps even if X1 is ON. ● If the memory area content specified by [S] is 0 from the start, the operation does not jump to a label number, and the next processing is performed.
  • Page 141 4.3 LOOP, LBL (Loop, Label) ● If the LBL instruction address is before that of the LOOP instruction, the TM, CT, and SR instructions are processed as follows when the LOOP instruction is executed. LBL1 Executes repeatedly while the execution condition is ON.
  • Page 142 4.3 LOOP, LBL (Loop, Label) Example 2: The DT100 value is transferred to DT200 to DT219. ● The LOOP instruction and LBL instruction cannot be used in the step ladder area (SSTP to STPE range). ● It is not possible to jump from a main program to a subprogram (a subroutine or interrupt program after the ED instruction), from a subprogram to a main program, or from a subprogram to another subprogram.

  • Page 143: Ed (End)

    4.4 ED (End) 4.4 ED (End) Indicates the end of a regular program area. ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation ● Write the ED instruction at the end of the regular program area. Program area Address Normal program area Subroutine program Interrupt program ●...

  • Page 144: Cnde (Conditional End)

    4.5 CNDE (Conditional End) 4.5 CNDE (Conditional End) ■ Instruction format Execution conditions CNDE ■ Outline of operation ● Ends arithmetic processing of the program at the specified address. ● When the execution condition turns ON, arithmetic processing of the program ends, and processing such as input and output is performed.
  • Page 145 4.5 CNDE (Conditional End) Program that executes when "CNDE" executed CNDE Program that is not executed when "CNDE" executed Execution during normal scan WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 4-17...

  • Page 146: Eject

    4.6 EJECT 4.6 EJECT ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation ● When printing out a program created using tool software, a page break occurs at the location at which this instruction is inserted. ● As with NOP instructions, no processing is performed in the program. ■...

  • Page 147: Step Ladder Instructions

    5 Step ladder Instructions 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End)..................5-2 5.2 SCLR (Clear Multiple Processes) ............5-17 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 148 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation ● When the NSTL or NSTP instruction is executed, the process of the specified number starting from the SSTP instruction is started and executed.
  • Page 149 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) The processes are selected and executed according to conditions. Process 2 Process 1 Process 4 Process 3 3. Parallel branch merge control • Multiple processes are executed simultaneously. •...
  • Page 150 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) Normal ladder area SSTP 1 Step ladder area SSTP n STPE Normal ladder area ● There is a special internal relay that turns ON for one scan only when a process on the step ladder starts.
  • Page 151 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) (Power ON) Shift input Not executing Executing Executing Executing ● Be aware that, if the NSTP instruction is used with instructions that change the order of execution such as the MC to MCE instructions or the JP to LBL instructions (see 1 to 6 below), the operation of instructions may change depending on the instruction execution and execution condition timing.
  • Page 152 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) Indicates the "end of the step ladder area". Be sure to write this instruction at the end of the final process. This makes the final process from SSTP to STPE. Normal ladder area SSTP1...
  • Page 153 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) ● Processes do not need to be started in numerical order. You can execute multiple processes simultaneously. ● When the output in a process that has not been started is forcibly turned ON or OFF, even if the forced ON/OFF operation is canceled, the output state will be held until the process starts.
  • Page 154 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) <Example> ● When a process is cleared, the operation of each instruction used in that process is as follows. OT instruction All OFF KP instruction Holds the state SET instruction Holds the state RST instruction...

  • Page 155: Process Flowchart

    5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) ● Processes do not need to be executed in numerical order. You can also program the start instruction to invoke a previous process according to conditions. [Program example] 1.
  • Page 156 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) Program ● NSTP 10 SSTP 10 Process 10 NSTP 11 SSTP 11 NSTP 12 Process 11 SSTP 12 Process 12 CSTP 12 STPE Timing chart ● Process 10 Start clear Process 11...
  • Page 157 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) (2) Selection branch control of a process This program selects and switches to the next process according to the actions and results of a particular process. Each process loops until its work is completed. ●...
  • Page 158 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) Program ● Timing chart ● This is an example of when X101 turns ON. 5-12 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 159 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) X100 X101 X102 X103 X104 X200 R150 Process 100 Start clear R151 Process 101 R152 R153 Process 200 (3) Parallel branch merge control of a process This program starts multiple processes at the same time.
  • Page 160 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) Process flowchart ● Process 0 Process 10 Process 20 Process 11 Process 30 5-14 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 161 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) Program ● NSTP 0 SSTP 0 Process 0 NSTL 10 NSTL 10 NSTL 20 SSTP 10 Process 10 NSTL 11 NSTL 11 SSTP 20 R100 Process 20 SSTP 11 R100 NSTL 30...
  • Page 162 5.1 SSTP, NSTL (NSTP), CSTP, STPE (Start Step, Next Step, Clear Step, Step End) Timing chart ● X111 Start clear Process 0 Process 0 Process 10 Process 20 Process 11 Process 30 5-16 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 163: Instruction Format

    5.2 SCLR (Clear Multiple Processes) 5.2 SCLR (Clear Multiple Processes) ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation When the SCLR instruction is executed, all active processes from process n1 through process n2 are cleared. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When input XF turns ON, active processes from 1 through 3 are cleared.
  • Page 164 5.2 SCLR (Clear Multiple Processes) Process 0 Process 1 Process 2 Process 3 XF (block area) ■ Precautions for programming ● Specify values so that n1 is equal to or smaller than n2. ● The SCLR instruction can be executed from both normal ladder areas and active processes. 5-18 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 165: Subroutine Instructions

    6 Subroutine Instructions 6.1 CALL/SUB/RET (Subroutine Call, Subroutine Entry, Subroutine Return) ....................6-2 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 166: Call/Sub/Ret (Subroutine Call, Subroutine Entry, Subroutine Return)

    6.1 CALL/SUB/RET (Subroutine Call, Subroutine Entry, Subroutine Return) 6.1 CALL/SUB/RET (Subroutine Call, Subroutine Entry, Subroutine Return) ■ Instruction format CALL 1 Subroutine program number SUB 1 Subroutine program number ■ Outline of operation ● When the execution condition turns ON, the CALL instruction is executed and the subroutine program of the specified number starting from the SUB instruction is executed.
  • Page 167 6.1 CALL/SUB/RET (Subroutine Call, Subroutine Entry, Subroutine Return) (Level 2) SUB0 (Level 3) SUB1 CALL1 (Level 4) SUB2 CALL2 (Level 5) SUB3 CALL3 SUB4 CALL4 Called from within subroutine Example of 5 layer nesting ■ Precautions for programming ● A subroutine program cannot be described in an interrupt program. INT 1 SUB 21 Subroutine...
  • Page 168 6.1 CALL/SUB/RET (Subroutine Call, Subroutine Entry, Subroutine Return) ■ Operation when the execution condition of the CALL instruction turns OFF When the execution condition of the CALL instruction turns OFF, the operation of that subroutine is not performed (the same applies to calls in master control and step ladders). In this case, the operation of each instruction used in the subroutine is as follows.

  • Page 169: Interrupt Instructions

    7 Interrupt Instructions 7.1 INT/IRET (Interrupt / Interrupt Return) ..........7-2 7.2 ICTL (Interrupt Control)...............7-8 7.2.1 How to start the interrupt program when executing the high-speed counter match ON / match OFF instruction ........7-15 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 170: Int/Iret (Interrupt / Interrupt Return)

    7.1 INT/IRET (Interrupt / Interrupt Return) 7.1 INT/IRET (Interrupt / Interrupt Return) ■ Instruction format INT 0 Interrupt program number IRET ■ Outline of operation ● When an interrupt is input, the interrupt program of the number specified is executed starting from the INT instruction.
  • Page 171 7.1 INT/IRET (Interrupt / Interrupt Return) Interrupt program number Interrupt input High-speed counter target value match interrupt INT6 − INT7 − INT8 − − INT9 − − INT10 − − INT11 − − INT12 − − INT13 − − INT24 Periodic interrupt −...
  • Page 172 7.1 INT/IRET (Interrupt / Interrupt Return) ● If the interrupt occurs, the interrupt program with the corresponding number is executed. Execution Execution Execution INT input ● If interrupts are disabled, they will be executed when execution is enabled with the ICTL instruction.
  • Page 173 7.1 INT/IRET (Interrupt / Interrupt Return) INT 1 SUB 11 Subroutine IRET ● An interrupt program cannot be used in a subroutine program. SUB 11 INT 0 Subroutine Interrupt program IRET ● Another interrupt program cannot be used in an interrupt program. ■...
  • Page 174 7.1 INT/IRET (Interrupt / Interrupt Return) Main program processing INT1 program processing INT2 program processing INT3 program processing INT1 input INT2 input INT3 input ● When multiple interrupts occur during execution of an interrupt program, they will be executed in order from the smallest program number when the program has finished execution.
  • Page 175 7.1 INT/IRET (Interrupt / Interrupt Return) ■ Interrupt program execution waiting and clearing ● When multiple interrupts occur simultaneously or when a new interrupt occurs during execution of another interrupt program, the interrupts of lower priority will enter an "execution wait state".

  • Page 176: Ictl (Interrupt Control)

    7.2 ICTL (Interrupt Control) 7.2 ICTL (Interrupt Control) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the control data, or constant data Area storing the control data, or constant data ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 177 7.2 ICTL (Interrupt Control) ■ Description examples Example 1) Setting a periodic interrupt every 10 ms at the start of operation R9013 INT24 executed ICTL every 10 ms (Note 1) R9013 (initial pulse relay) is a relay that turns ON in only the first scan after execution begins. Example 2) Enabling INT0 to 3 when X0 rises Enable INT0 ICTL...
  • Page 178 7.2 ICTL (Interrupt Control) ■ Precautions for programming Inputs that can actually be used as interrupt inputs. (Refer to the table below) Interrupt program number Interrupt input INT0 INT1 INT2 INT3 INT4 INT5 INT6 INT7 INT8 − INT9 − INT10 −...
  • Page 179 7.2 ICTL (Interrupt Control) e.g. Clearing interrupt program INT0 to INT2, not clearing INT3 to IN13 Bit 15 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 10 9 (INT number) 3.
  • Page 180 7.2 ICTL (Interrupt Control) Bit 15 Bit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 (INT number) 10 9 Input contact (INT0) (INT1) (INT2) (INT3) (INT4) (INT5) (INT6) (INT7) (INT8) (INT9) (INT10) (INT11) (INT12)
  • Page 181 7.2 ICTL (Interrupt Control) ICTL execution (enable) Main program Execution Execution INT0 program Execution INT5 program Execution INT0 input Occurs INT5 input Occurs Disable/Enable Disabled Enabled ■ Example setting to clear interrupts [S1]: H0100 Clears the interrupts from a specified input contact or interrupts matching the target value [S2]: HFE Clears INT0 interrupt (bit 0 is"0"), others are not cleared (Note 1)
  • Page 182 7.2 ICTL (Interrupt Control) ICTL execution (INT0 clear) Main program Execution Execution INT0 program INT1 program Execution Clear INT0 input INT1 input Disable/Enable Disabled Enabled (Note 1) As INT0 has been cleared, it will not be executed even after being enabled. INT1 has not been cleared, so it will be executed after being enabled.

  • Page 183: How To Start The Interrupt Program When Executing The High-Speed Counter Match On / Match Off Instruction

    7.2 ICTL (Interrupt Control) 7.2.1 How to start the interrupt program when executing the high-speed counter match ON / match OFF instruction Set the counter via the system register. (It is not necessary to set the external interrupt.) Specify the interrupt program in the program. The high-speed counters correspond to the interrupt programs as indicated in the table below.
  • Page 184 (MEMO) 7-16 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 185: Special Setting Instructions

    8 Special Setting Instructions 8.1 SYS1 (Communication Condition Setting) ..........8-2 8.2 SYS1 (Password setting) ..............8-8 8.3 SYS1 (Interrupt setting) ..............8-10 8.4 SYS1 [PC (PLC) Link Time Setting]............8-12 8.5 SYS1 (MEWTOCOL-COM response control) ........8-14 8.6 SYS1 (Change high-speed counter operation mode) ......8-16 8.7 SYS2 [System Register (No.40 to No.48, No.50 to 57) Change] ..8-18 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 186: Sys1 (Communication Condition Setting)

    8.1 SYS1 (Communication Condition Setting) 8.1 SYS1 (Communication Condition Setting) ■ Instruction format (Note 1) In the example shown in the figure above, the transmission format and baud rate of the COM1 port are set as below. Character bit length: 8; Parity bit: Odd parity; Stop bit: 1 Baud rate: 19200 bps ■...
  • Page 187 8.1 SYS1 (Communication Condition Setting) ● Insert space characters in front of the first keyword so that the total number of characters of the first and second keywords is 12. (The number of space characters to be inserted in front of the first keyword is 12 minus the total number of characters to be entered for the keywords.) For FPWIN-GR7 Ver.2.23 or later, if the character constant consists of less than 12...

  • Page 188: Setting Example

    8.1 SYS1 (Communication Condition Setting) First keyword Second keyword Ports to be used Baud rate COM2: COM2 port 4800: 4800 bps 57600: 57600 bps TOOL: COM0 port 9600: 9600 bps 115200: 115200 bps (Note 1) If the baud rate is changed as below, communications passing through all COM ports will be reset. Baud rates of all COM ports: 4800 bps or higher ↔...
  • Page 189 8.1 SYS1 (Communication Condition Setting) Exampl “COM2No,D0123” Settings (For indirect specification of unit numbers) Port: COM2 / Unit number: Value set in DT0123 ■ Specifying the communication conditions (response time of COM port) ● Specify the response time of a COM port. First keyword Second keyword Ports to be used...
  • Page 190 8.1 SYS1 (Communication Condition Setting) Exampl “˽˽˽˽COM1,ETX” Settings Port: COM1 / Terminator: ETX Exampl “˽˽˽˽˽COM1,CR” Settings Port: COM1 / Terminator: CR Exampl “˽COM2,NOTERM” Settings Port: COM2 / Terminator: No terminator Exampl “˽˽˽COM2,TIME” Settings Port: COM2 / Terminator: Enables end time ■...
  • Page 191 8.1 SYS1 (Communication Condition Setting) Setting example Exampl “˽˽˽COM1,RTS1” Settings Port: COM1 / RS (Request to Send) control: Disables communication Exampl “˽˽˽COM1,RTS0” Settings Port: COM1 / RS (Request to Send) control: Enables communication ■ Flag operations Name Description Set when non-keyword text or an out-of-range value is specified for the first and second keywords.

  • Page 192: Sys1 (Password Setting)

    8.2 SYS1 (Password setting) 8.2 SYS1 (Password setting) ■ Instruction format SYS1 " PASS,ABCD" First keyword Second keyword SYS1 "PAS,abcdefgh" First keyword Second keyword ■ Operands Items Settings Character constant ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand Index...
  • Page 193 8.2 SYS1 (Password setting) ■ Precautions for programming ● When this instruction is executed, it takes approximately 100 ms to write to the built-in F- ROM. ● If the specified password is the same as the password that has already been written, the password is not written to the F-ROM.

  • Page 194: Sys1 (Interrupt Setting)

    8.3 SYS1 (Interrupt setting) 8.3 SYS1 (Interrupt setting) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Character constant ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand Index WX WY WR WL SV modifier Device K H M f ●...
  • Page 195 8.3 SYS1 (Interrupt setting) when the program is verified. When BOTH has been specified, the contents of the system registers do not change. ● Put (12 characters – number of input characters) spaces in front of Keyword 1 so that Keyword 1 and Keyword 2 combined have 12 characters.

  • Page 196: Sys1 [Pc (Plc) Link Time Setting]

    8.4 SYS1 [PC (PLC) Link Time Setting] 8.4 SYS1 [PC (PLC) Link Time Setting] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Character constant ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand Index WX WY WR WL SV modifier Device K H M f...
  • Page 197 8.4 SYS1 [PC (PLC) Link Time Setting] 2. Error detection time for transmission assurance relay ■ Precautions for programming ● The program should be placed at the beginning of all PLCs being linked, and the same values should be set. ●...

  • Page 198: Sys1 (Mewtocol-Com Response Control)

    8.5 SYS1 (MEWTOCOL-COM response control) 8.5 SYS1 (MEWTOCOL-COM response control) ■ Instruction format （ ） SYS1 " COM1,WAIT2" First keyword Second keyword ■ Operands Items Settings Character constant ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand Index WX WY WR WL SV modifier...
  • Page 199 8.5 SYS1 (MEWTOCOL-COM response control) ■ Specify keywords ● If the communication mode has been set to computer link mode or MODBUS RTU mode Set time = scan time x n (n: 0 to 999) ● If the communication mode has been set to PC (PLC) link mode Set time = n μs (n: 0 to 999) ●...

  • Page 200: Sys1 (Change High-Speed Counter Operation Mode)

    8.6 SYS1 (Change high-speed counter operation mode) 8.6 SYS1 (Change high-speed counter operation mode) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Character constant ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand Index WX WY WR WL SV modifier Device K H M f...
  • Page 201 8.6 SYS1 (Change high-speed counter operation mode) ● When UP or DOWN has been specified, the contents of the system registers change in accordance with the specification, meaning a verification error may occur in some cases when the program is verified. When BOTH has been specified, the contents of the system registers do not change.

  • Page 202: Sys2 [System Register (No.40 To No.48, No.50 To 57) Change]

    8.7 SYS2 [System Register (No.40 to No.48, No.50 to 57) Change] 8.7 SYS2 [System Register (No.40 to No.48, No.50 to 57) Change] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of area storing 16-bit data Starting number of the system register to be specified (K40 to K47, K50 to K57) Ending number of the system register to be specified (K40 to K47, K50 to K57) ■...

  • Page 203: Program Example

    8.7 SYS2 [System Register (No.40 to No.48, No.50 to 57) Change] Name Sett values/range W0-1 Range used by link register 0 to 128 words setting Link relay transmission starting No. 64 to 127 Link relay transmission size 0 to 64 words Link register transmission starting No.
  • Page 204 8.7 SYS2 [System Register (No.40 to No.48, No.50 to 57) Change] ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 Turns ON when D1>D2 R9008 Turns ON when a set value is outside the specified range of a system register setting value (ER) 8-20 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 205: Compare Contact Instructions

    9 Compare Contact Instructions 9.1 ST=, ST <>, ST>, ST>=, ST<, ST<= [16-bit Data Comparison (Start)] ....................9-2 9.2 AN=, AN<>, AN>, AN>=, AN<, AN<= [16-bit Data Comparison (AND)] ....................9-4 9.3 OR= OR <> OR > OR >= OR < OR <= [16-bit Data Comparison (OR)] .....................9-6 9.4 STD=, STD<>, STD>, STD>=, STD<, STD<= [32-bit Data Comparison(start)] ................9-8...

  • Page 206: St=, St <>, St>, St>=, St<, St<= [16-Bit Data Comparison (Start)]

    9.1 ST=, ST <>, ST>, ST>=, ST<, ST<= [16-bit Data Comparison (Start)] 9.1 ST=, ST <>, ST>, ST>=, ST<, ST<= [16-bit Data Comparison (Start)] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Comparison data 1: Number of area storing 16-bit data, or constant data Comparison data 2: Number of area storing 16-bit data, or constant data ■...
  • Page 207 9.1 ST=, ST <>, ST>, ST>=, ST<, ST<= [16-bit Data Comparison (Start)] ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program Compares the value of data register DT0 with K50. If DT0 = K50, external output Y30 turns ON. Compares the value of DT0 with K60. If DT0 ≥ K60, Y31 turns ON. Value of DT0 ■...

  • Page 208: An=, An<>, An>, An>=, An<, An<= [16-Bit Data Comparison (And)]

    9.2 AN=, AN<>, AN>, AN>=, AN<, AN<= [16-bit Data Comparison (AND)] 9.2 AN=, AN<>, AN>, AN>=, AN<, AN<= [16-bit Data Comparison (AND)] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Comparison data 1: Number of area storing 16-bit data, or constant data Comparison data 2: Number of area storing 16-bit data, or constant data ■...
  • Page 209 9.2 AN=, AN<>, AN>, AN>=, AN<, AN<= [16-bit Data Comparison (AND)] ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay X0 turns ON, the value of DT0 and K60 are compared, and if DT0 is equal to or greater than K60, the external output Y30 turns ON. If X0 is OFF or if DT0 is less than K60, Y30 turns OFF.

  • Page 210: Or= Or <> Or > Or >= Or < Or <= [16-Bit Data Comparison (Or)]

    9.3 OR= OR <> OR > OR >= OR < OR <= [16-bit Data Comparison (OR)] 9.3 OR= OR <> OR > OR >= OR < OR <= [16-bit Data Comparison (OR)] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Comparison data 1: Number of area storing 16-bit data, or constant data Comparison data 2: Number of area storing 16-bit data, or constant data ■...

  • Page 211: Precautions For Use

    9.3 OR= OR <> OR > OR >= OR < OR <= [16-bit Data Comparison (OR)] ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When external input X0 turns ON, or the result of comparison between the value of DT0 and K60 is DT0 ≥...

  • Page 212: Std=, Std<>, Std>, Std>=, Std<, Std<= [32-Bit Data Comparison(Start)]

    9.4 STD=, STD<>, STD>, STD>=, STD<, STD<= [32-bit Data Comparison(start)] 9.4 STD=, STD<>, STD>, STD>=, STD<, STD<= [32-bit Data Comparison(start)] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Comparison data 1: Area number storing the 32-bit data, or constant data Comparison data 2: Area number storing the 32-bit data, or constant data ■...
  • Page 213 9.4 STD=, STD<>, STD>, STD>=, STD<, STD<= [32-bit Data Comparison(start)] ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program The 32-bit value that is a combination of data registers DT0 and DT1 is compared with the 32- bit value that is a combination of DT100 and DT101, and if (DT0, DT1) = (DT100, DT101), external output Y30 turns ON.

  • Page 214: And=, And<>, And>, And>=, And<, And<= [32-Bit Data Comparison (And)]

    9.5 AND=, AND<>, AND>, AND>=, AND<, AND<= [32-bit Data Comparison (AND)] 9.5 AND=, AND<>, AND>, AND>=, AND<, AND<= [32-bit Data Comparison (AND)] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Comparison data 1: Area number storing the 32-bit data, or constant data Comparison data 2: Area number storing the 32-bit data, or constant data ■...
  • Page 215 9.5 AND=, AND<>, AND>, AND>=, AND<, AND<= [32-bit Data Comparison (AND)] (DT0, DT1) ≥ (DT100, DT101), the external output Y30 turns ON. If X0 is OFF or if (DT0, DT1) is less than (D100, D101), Y30 turns OFF. ■ Precautions for use ●...

  • Page 216: Ord=, Ord<>, Ord>, Ord>=, Ord<, Ord<= [32-Bit Data Comparison (Or)]

    9.6 ORD=, ORD<>, ORD>, ORD>=, ORD<, ORD<= [32-bit Data Comparison (OR)] 9.6 ORD=, ORD<>, ORD>, ORD>=, ORD<, ORD<= [32-bit Data Comparison (OR)] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Comparison data 1: Area number storing the 32-bit data, or constant data Comparison data 2: Area number storing the 32-bit data, or constant data ■...
  • Page 217 9.6 ORD=, ORD<>, ORD>, ORD>=, ORD<, ORD<= [32-bit Data Comparison (OR)] ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When external input X0 turns ON, or when (DT0, DT1) ≥ (DT100, DT101) after a comparison between the 32-bit value from combining data register DT0 and DT1 and the 32-bit value from combining data register DT100 and DT101, then the external output Y30 is ON.

  • Page 218: Stf=, Stf<>, Stf>, Stf>=, Stf< And Stf<= [Floating Point Real Number Data Comparison (Start)]

    9.7 STF=, STF<>, STF>, STF>=, STF< and STF<= [Floating point real number data comparison (start)] 9.7 STF=, STF<>, STF>, STF>=, STF< and STF<= [Floating point real number data comparison (start)] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing real number data, or real number data (comparison data 1) (two words) Area storing real number data, or real number data (comparison data 2) (two words) ■...

  • Page 219: Operation Example

    9.7 STF=, STF<>, STF>, STF>=, STF< and STF<= [Floating point real number data comparison (start)] ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program The real number that is a combination of data registers DT0 and DT1 is compared with the real number that is a combination of data registers DT100 and DT101, and if (DT0, DT1) is equal to (DT100, DT101), external output Y30 turns ON.

  • Page 220: Anf=, Anf<>, Anf>, Anf>=, Anf<, Anf<= [Floating Point Real Number Data Comparison (And)]

    9.8 ANF=, ANF<>, ANF>, ANF>=, ANF<, ANF<= [Floating point real number data comparison (AND)] 9.8 ANF=, ANF<>, ANF>, ANF>=, ANF<, ANF<= [Floating point real number data comparison (AND)] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing real number data, or real number data (comparison data 1) (two words) Area storing real number data, or real number data (comparison data 2) (two words) ■...
  • Page 221 9.8 ANF=, ANF<>, ANF>, ANF>=, ANF<, ANF<= [Floating point real number data comparison (AND)] DT101, and if (DT0, DT1) is equal to or greater than (DT100, DT101), external output Y30 turns ON. If X0 is OFF or if (DT0, DT1) is less than (D100, D101), Y30 turns OFF. ■...

  • Page 222: Orf=, Orf<>, Orf>, Orf>=, Orf<, Orf<= [Floating Point Real Number Data Comparison (Or)]

    9.9 ORF=, ORF<>, ORF>, ORF>=, ORF<, ORF<= [floating point real number data comparison (OR)] 9.9 ORF=, ORF<>, ORF>, ORF>=, ORF<, ORF<= [floating point real number data comparison (OR)] ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing real number data, or real number data (comparison data 1) (two words) Area storing real number data, or real number data (comparison data 2) (two words) ■...
  • Page 223 9.9 ORF=, ORF<>, ORF>, ORF>=, ORF<, ORF<= [floating point real number data comparison (OR)] ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program If external input X0 is ON, or if the real number values of combined data registers DT0 and DT1 and the real number values of combined data registers DT100 and DT101 are compared and (DT0, DT1) ≥...
  • Page 224 (MEMO) 9-20 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 225 10 Transfer Instructions 10.1 F0 MV (16-bit Data Transfer) ............10-2 10.2 F0 MV (10 µsec Ring Counter Read) ..........10-4 10.3 F1 DMV (32-bit Data Transfer) ............10-5 10.4 F2 MV/ (16-bit Data Inversion and Transfer) ........10-7 10.5 F3 DMV/ (32-bit Data Inversion and Transfer)........10-9 10.6 F5 BTM (Bit Data Transfer)...............10-11 10.7 F6 DGT (Digit Data Transfer)............10-16 10.8 F7 MV2 (Two 16-bit Data Transfer to Single Area)......10-20...

  • Page 226: F0 Mv (16-Bit Data Transfer)

    10.1 F0 MV (16-bit Data Transfer) 10.1 F0 MV (16-bit Data Transfer) Transfers the 16-bit data in the specified area number. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area where data is transferred to ■...
  • Page 227 10.1 F0 MV (16-bit Data Transfer) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 10-3...

  • Page 228: F0 Mv (10 Μsec Ring Counter Read)

    10.2 F0 MV (10 µsec Ring Counter Read) 10.2 F0 MV (10 µsec Ring Counter Read) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area where data is transferred to ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand Index WX WY WR WL SV...

  • Page 229: F1 Dmv (32-Bit Data Transfer)

    10.3 F1 DMV (32-bit Data Transfer) 10.3 F1 DMV (32-bit Data Transfer) Transfers 32-bit data to the specified area number. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Area where data is transferred to ■...
  • Page 230 10.3 F1 DMV (32-bit Data Transfer) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) 10-6 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 231: F2 Mv/ (16-Bit Data Inversion And Transfer)

    10.4 F2 MV/ (16-bit Data Inversion and Transfer) 10.4 F2 MV/ (16-bit Data Inversion and Transfer) Inverts and transfers 16-bit data at the specified area number. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area where data is transferred to ■...
  • Page 232 10.4 F2 MV/ (16-bit Data Inversion and Transfer) DT10 DT20 1111 DT11 5555 DT21 DT12 1234 DT22 FFFF R0:ON F2 execution Invert and transfer DT10 DT20 AAAA DT11 5555 DT21 DT12 1234 DT22 FFFF DT11 = "0101 0101 0101 0101" (H5555) ↓Invert and transfer DT20 = "1010 1010 1010 1010"...

  • Page 233: F3 Dmv/ (32-Bit Data Inversion And Transfer)

    10.5 F3 DMV/ (32-bit Data Inversion and Transfer) 10.5 F3 DMV/ (32-bit Data Inversion and Transfer) Inverts the 32-bit data in the specified area number and transfers it. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Area where data is transferred to ■...
  • Page 234 10.5 F3 DMV/ (32-bit Data Inversion and Transfer) DT10 25AC DT20 1111 DT11 DT21 DT12 FFFD DT22 FFFF R0:ON F3 execution Invert and transfer DT10 25AC DT20 FFFF DT11 DT21 DT12 FFFD DT22 FFFF ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification.

  • Page 235: Instruction Format

    10.6 F5 BTM (Bit Data Transfer) 10.6 F5 BTM (Bit Data Transfer) Transfers 1-bit data in the specified 16-bit data to the specified bit. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area specifying the transfer method Data destination storage area ■...
  • Page 236 10.6 F5 BTM (Bit Data Transfer) [Source] Bits DT20 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 [Source] Bits DT10 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 R0:ON F5 execution Bits...
  • Page 237 10.6 F5 BTM (Bit Data Transfer) Number of transfer bits Setting (n) 3 bits H□2□ 4-bit H□3□ 5 bits H□4□ 6 bits H□5□ 7 bits H□6□ 8 bits H□7□ 9 bits H□8□ 10 bits H□9□ 11 bits H□A□ 12 bits H□B□...
  • Page 238 10.6 F5 BTM (Bit Data Transfer) Example 2: Transfer four bits from bit 14 of [S] to bit 2 of [D]... n = H23E Bits 4 bits starting from bit 14 Bits F5 execution Bits Bits 14 to 15 of [S] are sent to bits 2 to 3 of [D]. 0 is stored in bits 4 to 5 of [D].
  • Page 239 10.6 F5 BTM (Bit Data Transfer) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 10-15...

  • Page 240: F6 Dgt (Digit Data Transfer)

    10.7 F6 DGT (Digit Data Transfer) 10.7 F6 DGT (Digit Data Transfer) Transfers the specified 16-bit data in 4-bit (digit) units. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area specifying the transfer method Area where data is transferred to ■...
  • Page 241 10.7 F6 DGT (Digit Data Transfer) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 Among the DT10 data, only the lower 4 bits are transferred DT20 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 In this example, the content of the...
  • Page 242 10.7 F6 DGT (Digit Data Transfer) (1) To which digit in the destination 0: 0th digit 1: 1st digit 2: 2nd digit 3: 3rd digit (2) How many digits 0: 1 digit (4 bits) 1: 2 digit (8 bits) 2: 3 digit (12 bits) 3: 4 digit (16 bits) (3) From which digit in the sender 0: 0th digit...
  • Page 243 10.7 F6 DGT (Digit Data Transfer) Transferring digits 2 and 3 to digits 2 and 3 2 1 0 Set n=H212. 4. Multiple digits are transferred to a non-parallel destination Transferring digits 0 and 1 to digits 2 and 3 2 1 0 Set n=H210.

  • Page 244: F7 Mv2 (Two 16-Bit Data Transfer To Single Area)

    10.8 F7 MV2 (Two 16-bit Data Transfer to Single Area) 10.8 F7 MV2 (Two 16-bit Data Transfer to Single Area) Two 16-bit data are transferred from the specified area number. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Starting address of the data transfer destination (two words) ■...
  • Page 245 10.8 F7 MV2 (Two 16-bit Data Transfer to Single Area) ■ Related instructions Use the F190 MV3 instruction to transfer three types of 16-bit data. ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 10-21...

  • Page 246: F8 Dmv2 (32-Bit 2 Data Transfer)

    10.9 F8 DMV2 (32-bit 2 Data Transfer) 10.9 F8 DMV2 (32-bit 2 Data Transfer) Two 32-bit data are transferred from the specified area number. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Starting address of the data transfer destination area (four words) ■...
  • Page 247 10.9 F8 DMV2 (32-bit 2 Data Transfer) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 10-23...

  • Page 248: F10 Bkmv (Data Block Transfer)

    10.10 F10 BKMV (Data Block Transfer) 10.10 F10 BKMV (Data Block Transfer) Transfers data at the block unit. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the source data Final address of the source data Data destination storage area ■...
  • Page 249 10.10 F10 BKMV (Data Block Transfer) [S1] DT0 K 10 K 11 DT10 K 12 DT11 [S2] DT3 K 13 DT12 K 14 DT13 R0:ON F10 execution [S1] DT0 K 10 K 11 DT10 K 10 K 12 DT11 K 11 [S2] DT3 K 13 DT12...
  • Page 250 10.10 F10 BKMV (Data Block Transfer) ● If [S1] > [D], data is transferred starting from the lower address. In the following example, the data is stored in the order DT0 > DT1 > DT2. ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification.

  • Page 251: Instruction Format

    10.11 F11 COPY (16-bit Data Block Copy) 10.11 F11 COPY (16-bit Data Block Copy) Copies the specified data to all areas in the range specified by the block. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the copy source data, or constant data Starting number of data copy destination area End number of data copy destination area ■...
  • Page 252 10.11 F11 COPY (16-bit Data Block Copy) K 10 DT10 [D1] [S] DT1 K 11 DT11 K 12 DT12 K 13 DT13 K 14 DT14 [D2] R0:ON F11 execution K 10 DT10 K 11 [D1] [S] DT1 K 11 DT11 K 11 K 12 DT12...

  • Page 253: F12 Icrd (Data Read From F-Rom)

    10.12 F12 ICRD (Data Read from F-ROM) 10.12 F12 ICRD (Data Read from F-ROM) Reads the specified data from the F-ROM area. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting block number of the F-ROM area (Settable range: K0 to K31) Number of blocks to be read (Settable range: (K1 to K32) Starting number of area storing read data ■...
  • Page 254 10.12 F12 ICRD (Data Read from F-ROM) System register no.0 Settable range Setting of the program area size DT0 to DT10240 ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When execution condition R0 turns ON, 10 blocks of F-ROM data from block 0 to block 9 are transferred to data registers DT0 to DT20479.

  • Page 255: P13 Icwt (Writing To F-Rom)

    10.13 P13 ICWT (Writing to F-ROM) 10.13 P13 ICWT (Writing to F-ROM) Transfers the specified data to an area in F-ROM. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of the area storing the write data Number of blocks to be written (Settable range: K1) Starting number of the F-ROM area where data is to be written (Settable range: K0 to K31) ■...
  • Page 256 10.13 P13 ICWT (Writing to F-ROM) System register no.0 Settable range Setting of the program area size DT0 to DT22528 DT0 to DT10240 ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When execution condition R0 turns ON, one block (2,048 words) of data from data register DT0 is transferred to block 0 in the F-ROM area.

  • Page 257: F15 Xch (16-Bit Data Exchange)

    10.14 F15 XCH (16-bit Data Exchange) 10.14 F15 XCH (16-bit Data Exchange) Exchanges 16-bit data of two areas. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area that stores the 16-bit data to exchange with D2 Area that stores the 16-bit data to exchange with D1 ■...
  • Page 258 10.14 F15 XCH (16-bit Data Exchange) [D1] DT10 K 10 DT20 K 20 DT11 K 11 DT21 K 21 DT12 K 12 DT22 K 22 [D2] DT13 K 13 DT23 K 23 DT14 K 14 DT24 K 24 R0:ON F15 execution [D1] DT10 K 22 DT20...

  • Page 259: F16 Dxch (32-Bit Data Exchange)

    10.15 F16 DXCH (32-bit Data Exchange) 10.15 F16 DXCH (32-bit Data Exchange) Exchanges the 32-bit data of two areas. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 32-bit data to be exchanged with D2 Area storing the 32-bit data to be exchanged with D1 ■...
  • Page 260 10.15 F16 DXCH (32-bit Data Exchange) [D1] DT10 DT20 1234 DT11 FFFD DT21 5678 DT12 25AC DT22 9ABC [D2] DT13 DT23 DEF1 R0:ON F16 execution [D1] DT10 9ABC DT20 1234 DT11 DEF1 DT21 5678 DT12 25AC DT22 [D2] DT13 DT23 FFFD ■...

  • Page 261: F17 Swap (Higher/Lower Byte Exchange)

    10.16 F17 SWAP (Higher/Lower Byte Exchange) 10.16 F17 SWAP (Higher/Lower Byte Exchange) Exchanges higher (8-bit) and lower (8-bit) order bytes in 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing 16-bit data for higher 8-bit and lower 8-bit exchange ■...
  • Page 262 10.16 F17 SWAP (Higher/Lower Byte Exchange) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) 10-38 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 263: F18 Bxch (Block Exchange)

    10.17 F18 BXCH (Block Exchange) 10.17 F18 BXCH (Block Exchange) Exchanges data in blocks. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address for exchange block 1 Ending address for exchange block 1 Starting address for exchange block 2 ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer...
  • Page 264 10.17 F18 BXCH (Block Exchange) DT10 K 10 [D1] DT30 DT11 K 11 DT31 [D3] DT12 K 12 DT32 DT13 K 13 [D2] DT33 DT14 K 14 DT34 DT35 R0:ON F18 execution DT10 [D1] DT30 DT11 DT31 K 10 [D3] DT12 DT32 K 11...

  • Page 265: F190 Mv3 (Three 16-Bit Data Transfer To Single Area)

    10.18 F190 MV3 (Three 16-bit Data Transfer to Single Area) 10.18 F190 MV3 (Three 16-bit Data Transfer to Single Area) Three 16-bit data items are batch-transferred from the specified area number. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Starting address of the data transfer destination area (three words)
  • Page 266 10.18 F190 MV3 (Three 16-bit Data Transfer to Single Area) [S3] 16 bits [S2] 16 bits [S1] 16 bits Content of DT30 Content of DT20 Content of DT10 To DT42 To DT41 To DT40 ■ Related instructions Use the F87 MV2 instruction when batch-transferring two types of 16-bit data. ■...

  • Page 267: F191 Dmv3 (32-Bit 3-Data Batch Transfer)

    10.19 F191 DMV3 (32-Bit 3-Data Batch Transfer) 10.19 F191 DMV3 (32-Bit 3-Data Batch Transfer) Three 32-bit data items are batch-transferred from the specified area number. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Starting address of the data transfer destination area (six words) ■...
  • Page 268 10.19 F191 DMV3 (32-Bit 3-Data Batch Transfer) Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits [S3] [S2] [S1] Content of DT31 Content of DT30 Content of DT21 Content of DT20 Content of DT11 Content of DT10 To DT45 To DT44...

  • Page 269: Binary Arithmetic Instructions

    11 Binary Arithmetic Instructions 11.1 F20 + (16-bit Data Addition [D+S=D]) ..........11-2 11.2 F21 D+ (32-bit Data Addition [D+S=D]) ..........11-4 11.3 F22 + (16-bit Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) ...........11-6 11.4 F23 D+ (32-bit Data Addition [S1+S2=D]).........11-8 11.5 F25 - (16-bit Data Subtraction [D-S=D])..........11-10 11.6 F26 D-(32-bit Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) ..........11-13 11.7 F27 - (16-bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) ........11-15 11.8 F28 D- (32-bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) ........11-18...

  • Page 270: F20 + (16-Bit Data Addition [D+S=D])

    11.1 F20 + (16-bit Data Addition [D+S=D]) 11.1 F20 + (16-bit Data Addition [D+S=D]) 16-bit data is added. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 16-bit data to be added, or constant data Area storing the data (16-bit) to be added ■...
  • Page 271 11.1 F20 + (16-bit Data Addition [D+S=D]) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 + (addition) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 When converted to decimal...

  • Page 272: F21 D+ (32-Bit Data Addition [D+S=D])

    11.2 F21 D+ (32-bit Data Addition [D+S=D]) 11.2 F21 D+ (32-bit Data Addition [D+S=D]) 32-bit data is added. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 32-bit data to be added, or constant data Area storing the data (32-bit) to be added ■...
  • Page 273 11.2 F21 D+ (32-bit Data Addition [D+S=D]) Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT11 Content of DT10 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32-bit data. (addition) Content of DT1 Content of DT0 (Store result)

  • Page 274: F22 + (16-Bit Data Addition [S1+S2=D])

    11.3 F22 + (16-bit Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) 11.3 F22 + (16-bit Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) This is an instruction that adds 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 16-bit data to be added, or constant data Area storing the 16-bit data to be added, or constant data Area storing the addition results ■...
  • Page 275 11.3 F22 + (16-bit Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 + (addition) DT20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 DT30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 When converted to decimal...

  • Page 276: F23 D+ (32-Bit Data Addition [S1+S2=D])

    11.4 F23 D+ (32-bit Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) 11.4 F23 D+ (32-bit Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) This is an instruction that adds 32-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 32-bit data to be added, or constant data Area storing the 32-bit data to be added, or constant data Area storing the addition results ■...
  • Page 277 11.4 F23 D+ (32-bit Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT11 Content of DT10 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32-bit data. (addition) Content of DT21 Content of DT20 (Store result)

  • Page 278: F25 - (16-Bit Data Subtraction [D-S=D])

    11.5 F25 - (16-bit Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) 11.5 F25 - (16-bit Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) 16-bit data is subtracted. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the subtrahend (16-bit data), or constant data Area storing the subtrahend from (16-bit data) ■...
  • Page 279 11.5 F25 - (16-bit Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) DT20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 - (subtraction) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 DT20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 When converted to decimal...
  • Page 280 11.5 F25 - (16-bit Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) R900B Turns ON when the calculation result is"0" R9009 Turns ON when operation result overflows/underflows (CY) 11-12 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 281: Instruction Format

    11.6 F26 D-(32-bit Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) 11.6 F26 D-(32-bit Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) Subtracts 32-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area that stores subtrahends (32-bit data), or constant data Area storing the number to be subtracted (32-bit data) ■...
  • Page 282 11.6 F26 D-(32-bit Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT21 Content of DT20 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32-bit data. (subtraction) Content of DT11 Content of DT10 (Store result) The lower 16 bits of the subtraction result are stored in DT20 and the...

  • Page 283: F27 - (16-Bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D])

    11.7 F27 - (16-bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) 11.7 F27 - (16-bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) 16-bit data is subtracted. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the number to be subtracted (16-bit data), or constant data Area storing the subtrahend (16-bit data), or constant data Area that stores operation results ■...
  • Page 284 11.7 F27 - (16-bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 - (subtraction) DT20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 DT30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 When converted to decimal...
  • Page 285 11.7 F27 - (16-bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) R900B Turns ON when the calculation result is"0" R9009 Turns ON when operation result overflows/underflows (CY) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 11-17...

  • Page 286: F28 D- (32-Bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D])

    11.8 F28 D- (32-bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) 11.8 F28 D- (32-bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) Subtracts 32-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area that stores minuends (32-bit data), or constant data Area that stores subtrahends (32-bit data), or constant data Area that stores operation results ■...
  • Page 287 11.8 F28 D- (32-bit Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT11 Content of DT10 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32-bit data. (subtraction) Content of DT21 Content of DT20 (Store result)

  • Page 288: F30 * (16-Bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D])

    11.9 F30 * (16-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D]) 11.9 F30 * (16-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D]) Multiplies hexadecimal data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area storing the multiplication results (32-bit data) ■...
  • Page 289 11.9 F30 * (16-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D]) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 × × DT20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 DT31 DT30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0...

  • Page 290: F31 D

    11.10 F31 D* (32-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+3, D+2, D+1, D] 11.10 F31 D* (32-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+3, D+2, D+1, D] Multiplies 32-bit data items. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Multiplicand data: Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Multiplier data: Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing multiplication result (64-bit data) ■...
  • Page 291 11.10 F31 D* (32-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+3, D+2, D+1, D] ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program 16 bits 16 bits Content of DT11 Content of DT10 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32-bit data.

  • Page 292: F32 % (16-Bit Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D])

    11.11 F32 % (16-bit Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D]) 11.11 F32 % (16-bit Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D]) Divides 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Dividend data: Area storing 16-bit data, or constant data Divisor data: Area storing 16-bit data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing the division result (quotient) (remainder stored as 16-bit data in DT90015) ■...
  • Page 293 11.11 F32 % (16-bit Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D]) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 ÷ ÷ DT20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 DT30 Quotient K3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1...

  • Page 294: F33 D% (32-Bit Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D+1, D])

    11.12 F33 D% (32-bit Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D+1, D]) 11.12 F33 D% (32-bit Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D+1, D]) Divides 32-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Dividend data: Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Divisor data: Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing the division result (quotient) (remainder stored as 32-bit data in DT90015 and DT90016) ■...
  • Page 295 11.12 F33 D% (32-bit Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D+1, D]) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT11 Content of DT10 ÷ (division) Content of DT21 Content of DT20 (Store result) The quotient is stored in DT30 to DT31. Store to DT31 Store to DT30 The lower 16 bits of the remainder are stored in...

  • Page 296: F34 *W (16-Bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D])

    11.13 F34 *W (16-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D]) 11.13 F34 *W (16-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D]) Multiplies 16-bit data and stores the result in a 16-bit, one-word area. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area storing multiplication result (16-bit data) ■...
  • Page 297 11.13 F34 *W (16-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D]) ■ Precautions for programming Keep the operation result [D] within the range of K–32768 to K32767. ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9008 Turns ON when the operation result exceeds 16 bits (ER) R900B...

  • Page 298: F35 +1 (16-Bit Data Increment)

    11.14 F35 +1 (16-bit Data Increment) 11.14 F35 +1 (16-bit Data Increment) Adds 1 to 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area to which 1 is to be added ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 299 11.14 F35 +1 (16-bit Data Increment) ● Ensure that overflows do not occur in normal circumstances. ● If an overflow occurs, use a 32-bit operation instruction. ● If an overflow occurs, the CY flag (special internal relay R9009) turns ON. ■...

  • Page 300: F36 D+1 (32-Bit Data Increment)

    11.15 F36 D+1 (32-bit Data Increment) 11.15 F36 D+1 (32-bit Data Increment) Adds 1 to 32-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings The area (32-bit) that +1 is added to ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 301 11.15 F36 D+1 (32-bit Data Increment) ■ Precautions for programming ● With arithmetic operation instructions, in the event that the operation result falls beyond the range of values that can be handled, an overflow occurs. ● Ensure that overflows do not occur in normal circumstances. ●...

  • Page 302: F37 -1 (16-Bit Data Decrement)

    11.16 F37 -1 (16-bit Data Decrement) 11.16 F37 -1 (16-bit Data Decrement) Subtracts 1 from 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area to be decreased by 1 ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand Index...
  • Page 303 11.16 F37 -1 (16-bit Data Decrement) ● Under normal circumstances, do not allow an underflow to occur. ● If an underflow occurs, use the 32-bit operation instruction. ● If an underflow occurs, the CY flag (special internal relay R9009) will turn ON. ■...

  • Page 304: F38 D-1 (32-Bit Data Decrement)

    11.17 F38 D-1 (32-bit Data Decrement) 11.17 F38 D-1 (32-bit Data Decrement) Subtracts 1 from 32-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area (32-bit) from which 1 is subtracted ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 305 11.17 F38 D-1 (32-bit Data Decrement) ■ Precautions for programming ● If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction exceeds the numerical range that can be handled, an underflow will result. ● Under normal circumstances, do not allow an underflow to occur. ●...

  • Page 306: F39 D*D (32-Bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D])

    11.18 F39 D*D (32-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D]) 11.18 F39 D*D (32-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D]) Multiplies 32-bit data items and stores the result in the 32-bit two-word area. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Multiplicand data: Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Multiplier data: Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing multiplication result (32-bit data) ■...
  • Page 307 11.18 F39 D*D (32-bit Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D]) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT11 Content of DT10 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32-bit data.
  • Page 308 (MEMO) 11-40 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 309: Bcd Data Arithmetic Instructions

    12 BCD Data Arithmetic Instructions 12.1 F40 B+ (4-digit BCD Data Addition [D+S=D]) ........12-2 12.2 F41 DB+ (8-digit BCD Data Addition [D+S=D]) ........12-4 12.3 F42 B+ (4-digit BCD Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) .......12-6 12.4 F43 DB+ (8-digit BCD Data Addition [S1+S2=D])......12-8 12.5 F45 B- (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [D-S=D])........12-10 12.6 F46 DB- (8-digit BCD Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) ......12-12 12.7 F47 B- (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D])......12-14...

  • Page 310: F40 B+ (4-Digit Bcd Data Addition [D+S=D])

    12.1 F40 B+ (4-digit BCD Data Addition [D+S=D]) 12.1 F40 B+ (4-digit BCD Data Addition [D+S=D]) Adds 4-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 4-digit BCD data to be added, or constant data Area storing the 4-digit BCD data to be added to ■...
  • Page 311 12.1 F40 B+ (4-digit BCD Data Addition [D+S=D]) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (BCD) + (addition) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (BCD) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0...

  • Page 312: F41 Db+ (8-Digit Bcd Data Addition [D+S=D])

    12.2 F41 DB+ (8-digit BCD Data Addition [D+S=D]) 12.2 F41 DB+ (8-digit BCD Data Addition [D+S=D]) Adds 8-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 8-digit BCD data to be added, or constant data Area storing the 8-digit BCD data to be added to ■...
  • Page 313 12.2 F41 DB+ (8-digit BCD Data Addition [D+S=D]) Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT11 Content of DT10 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32-bit data. (addition) Content of DT1 Content of DT0...

  • Page 314: F42 B+ (4-Digit Bcd Data Addition [S1+S2=D])

    12.3 F42 B+ (4-digit BCD Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) 12.3 F42 B+ (4-digit BCD Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) Adds 4-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 4-digit BCD data to be added, or constant data Area storing the 4-digit BCD data to be added, or constant data Area storing the addition results ■...
  • Page 315 12.3 F42 B+ (4-digit BCD Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) DT10 (BCD) + (addition) DT20 (BCD) DT30 (BCD) ■ Precautions for programming ● If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction exceeds the maximum value that can be handled, this will result in an overflow. ●...

  • Page 316: F43 Db+ (8-Digit Bcd Data Addition [S1+S2=D])

    12.4 F43 DB+ (8-digit BCD Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) 12.4 F43 DB+ (8-digit BCD Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) Adds 8-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 8-digit BCD data to be added, or constant data Area storing the 8-digit BCD data to be added, or constant data Area storing the addition results ■...
  • Page 317 12.4 F43 DB+ (8-digit BCD Data Addition [S1+S2=D]) Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT11Content of DT10 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32 -bit data. (addition) Content of DT21 Content of DT20 (Store result)

  • Page 318: F45 B- (4-Digit Bcd Data Subtraction [D-S=D])

    12.5 F45 B- (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) 12.5 F45 B- (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) Subtracts 4-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the subtrahend (4-digit BCD data) or constant data Area storing the subtrahend (4-digit BCD data) ■...
  • Page 319 12.5 F45 B- (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) DT20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 (BCD) - (subtraction) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (BCD) DT20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0...

  • Page 320: F46 Db- (8-Digit Bcd Data Subtraction [D-S=D])

    12.6 F46 DB- (8-digit BCD Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) 12.6 F46 DB- (8-digit BCD Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) Subtracts 8-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area that stores the subtrahend (8-digit BCD data), or constant data Area storing the number to be subtracted (8-digit BCD data) ■...
  • Page 321 12.6 F46 DB- (8-digit BCD Data Subtraction [D-S=D]) Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT21 Content of DT20 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32-bit data. (subtraction) Content of DT11 Content of DT10...

  • Page 322: F47 B- (4-Digit Bcd Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D])

    12.7 F47 B- (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) 12.7 F47 B- (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) Subtracts 4-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the minuend (4-digit BCD data), or constant data Area storing the subtrahend (4-digit BCD data) or constant data Area that stores the calculation result ■...
  • Page 323 12.7 F47 B- (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 (BCD) - (subtraction) DT20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 (BCD) DT30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0...

  • Page 324: F48 Db- (8-Digit Bcd Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D])

    12.8 F48 DB- (8-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) 12.8 F48 DB- (8-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) Subtracts 8-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area that stores the minuend (8-digit BCD data), or constant data Area that stores the subtrahend (8-digit BCD data), or constant data Area that stores the calculation result ■...
  • Page 325 12.8 F48 DB- (8-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1-S2=D]) Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT11 Content of DT10 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32-bit data. (subtraction) Content of DT21 Content of DT20...

  • Page 326: F50 B* (4-Digit Bcd Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D])

    12.9 F50 B* (4-digit BCD Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D]) 12.9 F50 B* (4-digit BCD Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D]) Multiplies 4-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing 4-digit BCD data, or constant data Area storing 4-digit BCD data, or constant data Area storing multiplication result (8-digit BCD data) ■...
  • Page 327 12.9 F50 B* (4-digit BCD Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+1, D]) Of the 32-bit data multiplication results, the lower order 16 bits are stored in the specified memory area (DT30) and the higher order 16 bits is stored in the next area after the specified area (DT31).

  • Page 328: F51 Db* (8-Digit Bcd Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+3, D+2, D+1, D])

    12.10 F51 DB* (8-Digit BCD Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+3, D+2, D+1, D]) 12.10 F51 DB* (8-Digit BCD Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+3, D+2, D+1, Multiplies 8-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Multiplicand data: Area storing 8-digit BCD data, or constant data Multiplier data: Area storing 8-digit BCD data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing multiplication result (64-bit data) ■...
  • Page 329 12.10 F51 DB* (8-Digit BCD Data Multiplication [S1*S2=D+3, D+2, D+1, D]) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT11Content of DT10 The data in the specified memory area and in the following memory area are combined and treated as 32 -bit data.

  • Page 330: F52 B% (4-Digit Bcd Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D])

    12.11 F52 B% (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D]) 12.11 F52 B% (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D]) Divides 4-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Dividend data: Area storing 4-digit BCD data, or constant data Divisor data: Area storing 4-digit BCD data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing the divisor result (quotient) (remainder stored as 16-bit data in DT90015) ■...
  • Page 331 12.11 F52 B% (4-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D]) DT10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 ÷ DT20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 DT30 Quotient 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1...

  • Page 332: F53 Db% (8-Digit Bcd Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D+1, D])

    12.12 F53 DB% (8-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D+1, D]) 12.12 F53 DB% (8-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D+1, D]) Divides 8-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Dividend data: Area storing 8-digit BCD data, or constant data Divisor data: Area storing 8-digit BCD data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing the divisor result (quotient) (remainder stored as 32-bit data in DT90015 and DT90016) ■...
  • Page 333 12.12 F53 DB% (8-digit BCD Data Subtraction [S1/S2=D+1, D]) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program Upper 16 bits Lower 16 bits Content of DT11 Content of DT10 ÷ (division) Content of DT21 Content of DT20 (Store result) The quotient is stored in DT30 to DT31.

  • Page 334: F55 B+1 (4-Digit Bcd Data Increment)

    12.13 F55 B+1 (4-digit BCD Data Increment) 12.13 F55 B+1 (4-digit BCD Data Increment) Adds 1 to 4-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area to which 1 is to be added ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 335 12.13 F55 B+1 (4-digit BCD Data Increment) ● Ensure that overflows do not occur in normal circumstances. ● In the case of an overflow, use an 8-digit arithmetic operation instruction. ● If an overflow occurs, the CY flag (special internal relay R9009) turns ON. ■...

  • Page 336: F56 Db+1 (8-Digit Bcd Data Increment)

    12.14 F56 DB+1 (8-digit BCD Data Increment) 12.14 F56 DB+1 (8-digit BCD Data Increment) Adds 1 to the 8-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings The area (32-bit) that +1 is added to ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 337 12.14 F56 DB+1 (8-digit BCD Data Increment) ■ Precautions for programming ● If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction exceeds the maximum value that can be handled, this will result in an overflow. ● Ensure that overflows do not occur in normal circumstances. ●...

  • Page 338: F57 B-1 (4-Digit Bcd Data Decrement)

    12.15 F57 B-1 (4-digit BCD Data Decrement) 12.15 F57 B-1 (4-digit BCD Data Decrement) Subtracts 1 from 4-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area to be decreased by 1 ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 339 12.15 F57 B-1 (4-digit BCD Data Decrement) ■ Precautions for programming ● If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction exceeds the maximum value that can be handled, this will result in an underflow. ● Under normal circumstances, do not allow an underflow to occur. ●...

  • Page 340: F58 Db-1 (8-Digit Bcd Data Decrement)

    12.16 F58 DB-1 (8-digit BCD Data Decrement) 12.16 F58 DB-1 (8-digit BCD Data Decrement) Subtracts 1 from 8-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area (32-bit) from which 1 is subtracted ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 341 12.16 F58 DB-1 (8-digit BCD Data Decrement) ■ Precautions for programming ● If the result of an arithmetic operation instruction falls below the minimum value which can be handled, an underflow will result. ● Under normal circumstances, do not allow an underflow to occur. ●...
  • Page 342 (MEMO) 12-34 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 343: Data Comparison Instructions

    13 Data Comparison Instructions 13.1 F60 CMP (16-bit Data Comparison) ..........13-2 13.2 F61 DCMP (32-bit Data Comparison)..........13-8 13.3 F62 WIN (16-bit Data Band Comparison) .........13-12 13.4 F63 DWIN (32-bit Data Band Comparison) ........13-14 13.5 F64 BCMP (Block Data Comparison) ..........13-16 13.6 F373 DTR (16-bit Data Change Detection)........13-19 13.7 F374 DDTR (32-bit Data Change Detection) ........13-21 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 344: F60 Cmp (16-Bit Data Comparison)

    13.1 F60 CMP (16-bit Data Comparison) 13.1 F60 CMP (16-bit Data Comparison) Compares the two specified 16-bit data and outputs the judgment result to special internal relays. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Comparison data 1: Area storing 16-bit data, or constant data Comparison data 2: Area storing 16-bit data, or constant data ■...

  • Page 345: Operation Example

    13.1 F60 CMP (16-bit Data Comparison) Flag Relationship R900A R900B R900C R9009 between S1 and S2 > < Carry S1 > S2 Indefinite (Note 1) The above table shows the comparison results for signed integer. When comparing unsigned integer or BCD data, refer to "P.13-6". ■...
  • Page 346 13.1 F60 CMP (16-bit Data Comparison) This program has the same operation as the program example. ■ Precautions when using two or more comparison instructions ● The comparison instruction judgment flags R900A to R900C are updated each time comparison instructions are executed. ●...
  • Page 347 13.1 F60 CMP (16-bit Data Comparison) e.g. Example of comparison of DT0 and K100, and DT1 and K200 The comparison result for (a) is reflected in the contents of output relays Y10 to Y12 of program (b), and the comparison result for (c) is reflected in the contents of output relays Y13 to Y15 of program (d).
  • Page 348 13.1 F60 CMP (16-bit Data Comparison) e.g. Comparing the BCD data in DT0 and DT1 When DT0 is less than DT1, R1 turns ON When DT0 is equal to DT1, R2 turns ON When DT0 is greater than DT1, R3 turns ON ●...
  • Page 349 13.1 F60 CMP (16-bit Data Comparison) Name Description R9008 (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 13-7...

  • Page 350: F61 Dcmp (32-Bit Data Comparison)

    13.2 F61 DCMP (32-bit Data Comparison) 13.2 F61 DCMP (32-bit Data Comparison) Compares two specified 32-bit data, and outputs the result to special internal relays. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Comparison data 1: Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Comparison data 2: Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data ■...
  • Page 351 13.2 F61 DCMP (32-bit Data Comparison) (Note 1) The above table shows the comparison results for signed integer. When comparing unsigned integer or BCD data, refer to "P.13-11". ● Memory area is specified by the memory area number of the lower order hexadecimal part. ■...
  • Page 352 13.2 F61 DCMP (32-bit Data Comparison) ■ Precautions when using two or more comparison instructions ● The comparison instruction judgment flags R900A to R900C are updated each time comparison instructions are executed. ● Therefore, when using two or more comparison instructions: 1.
  • Page 353 13.2 F61 DCMP (32-bit Data Comparison) e.g. Comparing BCD data in DT0 to DT1 with BCD Data in DT10 to DT11 R1 turns ON when (DT1, DT0) < (DT11, DT10) R2 turns ON when (DT1, DT0) = (DT11, DT10) R3 turns ON when (DT1, DT0) > (DT11, DT10) ●...

  • Page 354: F62 Win (16-Bit Data Band Comparison)

    13.3 F62 WIN (16-bit Data Band Comparison) 13.3 F62 WIN (16-bit Data Band Comparison) Performs a band comparison of signed 16-bit data and outputs the comparison result to special internal relays. ■ Instruction format Lower limit Upper limit F62 WIN DT10 DT20 DT30...
  • Page 355 13.3 F62 WIN (16-bit Data Band Comparison) Flag Relationship between S1, R900A R900B R900C R9009 S2, and S3 > < Carry S1 < S2 × S2 ≤ S1 ≤ S3 × S3 < S1 × (Note 1) ×: Does not change. ■...

  • Page 356: F63 Dwin (32-Bit Data Band Comparison)

    13.4 F63 DWIN (32-bit Data Band Comparison) 13.4 F63 DWIN (32-bit Data Band Comparison) Performs a band comparison of signed 32-bit data and outputs the comparison result to special internal relays. ■ Instruction format Lower limit Upper limit F63 DWIN DT10 DT20 DT30...
  • Page 357 13.4 F63 DWIN (32-bit Data Band Comparison) ● The relationship between [S1], [S2], and [S3] affects R9009 to R900C as follows. Flag Relationship between S1, R900A R900B R900C R9009 S2, and S3 > < Carry S1 < S2 × S2 ≤ S1 ≤ S3 ×...

  • Page 358: F64 Bcmp (Block Data Comparison)

    13.5 F64 BCMP (Block Data Comparison) 13.5 F64 BCMP (Block Data Comparison) Detects matches in two block-specified areas in byte units. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the control data (4-digit BCD data), or constant data Starting address of comparison block 1 Starting address of comparison block 2 ■...
  • Page 359 13.5 F64 BCMP (Block Data Comparison) <Setting example> When specifying the 4 bytes from the low byte of the area specified by [S2] as block 1 and the 4 bytes from the high byte of the area specified by [S3] as block 2, set [S1] to H1004. ■...
  • Page 360 13.5 F64 BCMP (Block Data Comparison) (Note 1) As shown in the program example above, make sure to place the comparison internal relay before the flag relay. This is not necessary for normal execution. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the content specified by [S1] is not comprised of BCD data...

  • Page 361: F373 Dtr (16-Bit Data Change Detection)

    13.6 F373 DTR (16-bit Data Change Detection) 13.6 F373 DTR (16-bit Data Change Detection) Detects changes in word data numerical values. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area that detects data changes Area that stores data status during the previous execution ■...
  • Page 362 13.6 F373 DTR (16-bit Data Change Detection) ● Always insert execution conditions before the flag relay (R9009), as shown in the above program example. This is not necessary for normal execution. ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) R9009 Turns ON if there are changes to the specified data area...

  • Page 363: F374 Ddtr (32-Bit Data Change Detection)

    13.7 F374 DDTR (32-bit Data Change Detection) 13.7 F374 DDTR (32-bit Data Change Detection) Detects changes in double-word data (32-bit data) values. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area that detects data changes Area that stores data status during the previous execution ■...
  • Page 364 13.7 F374 DDTR (32-bit Data Change Detection) ● Always insert execution conditions before the flag relay (R9009), as shown in the above program example. This is not necessary for normal execution. ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) R9009 Turns ON if there are changes to the specified data area...

  • Page 365: Boolean Instructions

    14 Boolean Instructions 14.1 F65 WAN (16-bit Data AND).............14-2 14.2 F66 WOR (16-bit Data OR)...............14-4 14.3 F67 XOR (16-bit Data Exclusive OR) ..........14-6 14.4 F68 XNR (16-bit Data Exclusive NOR) ..........14-8 14.5 F69 WUNI [(S1 AND S3) OR (S2 AND S3) = D] (16-bit) ....14-10 14.6 F215 DAND (32-bit Data AND) ............14-12 14.7 F216 DOR (32-bit Data OR) .............14-14 14.8 F217 DXOR (32-bit Data Exclusive OR)...........14-16...

  • Page 366: F65 Wan (16-Bit Data And)

    14.1 F65 WAN (16-bit Data AND) 14.1 F65 WAN (16-bit Data AND) Calculates the logical conjunction of 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Data 1: Area storing data on which to perform the logical operation, or constant data Data 2: Area storing data on which to perform the logical operation, or constant data Storage location: Area storing the operation result ■...
  • Page 367 14.1 F65 WAN (16-bit Data AND) 15 ・ ・ 12 11 ・ ・ 8 7 ・ ・ 4 3 ・ ・ 0 (bit) 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 DT10: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DT20: R0:ON...

  • Page 368: F66 Wor (16-Bit Data Or)

    14.2 F66 WOR (16-bit Data OR) 14.2 F66 WOR (16-bit Data OR) Calculates the OR of 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Data 1: Area storing data on which to perform the logical operation, or constant data Data 2: Area storing data on which to perform the logical operation, or constant data Storage location: Area storing the operation result ■...
  • Page 369 14.2 F66 WOR (16-bit Data OR) 15 ・ ・ 12 11 ・ ・ 8 7 ・ ・ 4 3 ・ ・ 0 (bit) 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 DT10: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DT20: R0:ON...

  • Page 370: F67 Xor (16-Bit Data Exclusive Or)

    14.3 F67 XOR (16-bit Data Exclusive OR) 14.3 F67 XOR (16-bit Data Exclusive OR) Calculates the exclusive OR of 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Data 1: Area storing data on which to perform the logical operation, or constant data Data 2: Area storing data on which to perform the logical operation, or constant data Storage location: Area storing the operation result ■...
  • Page 371 14.3 F67 XOR (16-bit Data Exclusive OR) 15 ・ ・ 12 11 ・ ・ 8 7 ・ ・ 4 3 ・ ・ 0 (bit) 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 DT10: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DT20:...

  • Page 372: F68 Xnr (16-Bit Data Exclusive Nor)

    14.4 F68 XNR (16-bit Data Exclusive NOR) 14.4 F68 XNR (16-bit Data Exclusive NOR) Calculates the exclusive NOR of 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Data 1: Area storing data on which to perform the logical operation, or constant data Data 2: Area storing data on which to perform the logical operation, or constant data Storage location: Area storing the operation result ■...
  • Page 373 14.4 F68 XNR (16-bit Data Exclusive NOR) 15 ・ ・ 12 11 ・ ・ 8 7 ・ ・ 4 3 ・ ・ 0 (bit) 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 DT10: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 DT20:...

  • Page 374: F69 Wuni [(S1 And S3) Or (S2 And S3) = D] (16-Bit)

    14.5 F69 WUNI [(S1 AND S3) OR (S2 AND S3) = D] (16-bit) 14.5 F69 WUNI [(S1 AND S3) OR (S2 AND S3) = D] (16-bit) Combines two sets of word data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing data to be combined, or constant data Area storing data to be combined, or constant data Area storing mask data for combining, or constant data Area that stores operation results...
  • Page 375 14.5 F69 WUNI [(S1 AND S3) OR (S2 AND S3) = D] (16-bit) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program DT10 DT20 1010 1010 1010 1010 0101 0101 0101 0101 DT30 DT30 bit inversion data Inversion 1111 0000 0000 1111 0000...

  • Page 376: F215 Dand (32-Bit Data And)

    14.6 F215 DAND (32-bit Data AND) 14.6 F215 DAND (32-bit Data AND) Calculates logical conjunction of double word data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data on which OR operations will be performed, or constant data (two words) Area storing the data on which OR operations will be performed, or constant data (two words) Storage destination: Area that stores calculation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 377 14.6 F215 DAND (32-bit Data AND) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) R900B Turns ON when the calculation result is"0" WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 14-13...

  • Page 378: F216 Dor (32-Bit Data Or)

    14.7 F216 DOR (32-bit Data OR) 14.7 F216 DOR (32-bit Data OR) Performs OR operations double word data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data on which OR operations will be performed, or constant data (two words) Area storing the data on which OR operations will be performed, or constant data (two words) Storage destination: Area that stores calculation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 379 14.7 F216 DOR (32-bit Data OR) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) R900B Turns ON when the calculation result is"0" WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 14-15...

  • Page 380: F217 Dxor (32-Bit Data Exclusive Or)

    14.8 F217 DXOR (32-bit Data Exclusive OR) 14.8 F217 DXOR (32-bit Data Exclusive OR) Calculates the exclusive OR of double-word data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data on which OR operations will be performed, or constant data (two words) Area storing the data on which OR operations will be performed, or constant data (two words) Storage destination: Area that stores calculation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 381 14.8 F217 DXOR (32-bit Data Exclusive OR) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) R900B Turns ON when the calculation result is"0" WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 14-17...

  • Page 382: F218 Dxnr (32-Bit Data Exclusive Nor)

    14.9 F218 DXNR (32-bit Data Exclusive NOR) 14.9 F218 DXNR (32-bit Data Exclusive NOR) Calculates the exclusive NOR of double word data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data on which OR operations will be performed, or constant data (two words) Area storing the data on which OR operations will be performed, or constant data (two words) Storage destination: Area that stores calculation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 383 14.9 F218 DXNR (32-bit Data Exclusive NOR) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) R900B Turns ON when the calculation result is"0" WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 14-19...

  • Page 384: F219 Duni [(S1 And S3) Or (S2 And S3) = D] (32-Bit)

    14.10 F219 DUNI [(S1 AND S3) OR (S2 AND S3) = D] (32-bit) 14.10 F219 DUNI [(S1 AND S3) OR (S2 AND S3) = D] (32-bit) Combines two double words. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data to be combined, or constant data (two words) Area storing the data to be combined, or constant data (two words) Area storing mask data for combination, or constant data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words)
  • Page 385 14.10 F219 DUNI [(S1 AND S3) OR (S2 AND S3) = D] (32-bit) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program DT10, DT11 DT20, DT21 1010 1010 1010 1010 0101 0101 0101 0101 S2+1 S2+1 1100 1100 1100 1100 0011 0011 0011...
  • Page 386 (MEMO) 14-22 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 387: Data Conversion Instructions

    15 Data Conversion Instructions 15.1 F70 BCC [Block Check Code (ADD, SUB, XOR, CRC)]....15-3 15.2 F71 HEXA (Hexadecimal Data to ASCII Code Conversion) .....15-7 15.3 F72 AHEX (ASCII Code to Hexadecimal Data Conversion) .....15-10 15.4 F73 BCDA (BCD Data to ASCII Code Conversion) ......15-14 15.5 F74 ABCD (ASCII Code to BCD Data Conversion) ......15-18 15.6 F75 BINA (16-bit Binary Data to ASCII Code Conversion) ....15-22 15.7 F76 ABIN (ASCII Code to 16-bit Binary Data Conversion) ....15-25...
  • Page 388 15 Data Conversion Instructions 15.31 F237 GBIN (Gray Code to 16-bit Data Conversion) .......15-74 15.32 F238 DGBIN (Gray Code to 32-bit Data Conversion).....15-75 15.33 F240 COLM (Bit Line to Bit Column Conversion) ......15-77 15.34 F241 LINE (Bit Column to Bit Line Conversion) ......15-79 15-2 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 389: F70 Bcc [Block Check Code (Add, Sub, Xor, Crc)]

    15.1 F70 BCC [Block Check Code (ADD, SUB, XOR, CRC)] 15.1 F70 BCC [Block Check Code (ADD, SUB, XOR, CRC)] Calculates block check code (BCC). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing data specifying the calculation method, or constant data Starting address of the area storing target data Area storing the length (number of bytes) of the target data, or constant data Area that stores operation results...

  • Page 390: Calculation Method

    15.1 F70 BCC [Block Check Code (ADD, SUB, XOR, CRC)] Specification of control data [S1] Conversion data 0: Binary data (CRC: 2 bytes, Not CRC: 1 byte) 1: ASCII code (2 bytes) Storage starting position (number of bytes from D) 0 to F Storage starting position (number of bytes from S2) 0 to F...
  • Page 391 15.1 F70 BCC [Block Check Code (ADD, SUB, XOR, CRC)] F70 BCC [S1] Exclusive OR [S2] Start of target data [S3] Length of target data (12 bytes) [D] Calculation result > When this is executed, BCC (H 1D) is stored in the lower byte of DT6 of [D]. ●...
  • Page 392 15.1 F70 BCC [Block Check Code (ADD, SUB, XOR, CRC)] H0000 H0000 H0000 H0000 H3030 H3030 H5853 H4352 H2331 H3025 Specification of control data [S1] DT10 = H1C00 H0000 H0000 H0000 H3941 H3030 H3030 H5853 H4352 H2331 H3025 ● Calculation method: addition, conversion data: ASCII code H0000 H0000 H0030...

  • Page 393: F71 Hexa (Hexadecimal Data To Ascii Code Conversion)

    15.2 F71 HEXA (Hexadecimal Data to ASCII Code Conversion) 15.2 F71 HEXA (Hexadecimal Data to ASCII Code Conversion) Converts hexadecimal numeric values to ASCII code. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number for the area storing the hexadecimal numeric values Area storing the length of the numeric value (number of bytes) to be converted, or constant data Starting number of the area storing the ASCII code of conversion result ■...

  • Page 394: Conversion Example

    15.2 F71 HEXA (Hexadecimal Data to ASCII Code Conversion) ■ Precautions for programming 1. The two characters that make up one byte are interchanged when stored. 2. Converts two bytes as one section. Hexadecimal data (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) S1+1 Hexadecimal data Conversion result...
  • Page 395 15.2 F71 HEXA (Hexadecimal Data to ASCII Code Conversion) [Hexadecimal data] S1+1 3 bytes HEXA instruction execution (Conversion result) ■ Reference: ASCII code Higher Lower ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when the conversion range of the number of bytes specified by [S2] exceeds the R9007 area...

  • Page 396: F72 Ahex (Ascii Code To Hexadecimal Data Conversion)

    15.3 F72 AHEX (ASCII Code to Hexadecimal Data Conversion) 15.3 F72 AHEX (ASCII Code to Hexadecimal Data Conversion) Converts character strings in ASCII code to hexadecimal numbers. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of the area storing the ASCII code Area storing the number of ASCII codes (number of characters) to be converted, or constant data Number of the start of the area storing the hexadecimal number that is the result of conversion ■...
  • Page 397 15.3 F72 AHEX (ASCII Code to Hexadecimal Data Conversion) ASCII code (DT1, DT0) H 44 43 42 41 D C B A DT1 DT0 Value in hexadecimal (DT40) H CDAB ■ Precautions for programming 1. Two ASCII code characters are converted into two 1-byte numeric digits. At this time, the upper and lower characters are interchanged.
  • Page 398 15.3 F72 AHEX (ASCII Code to Hexadecimal Data Conversion) Conversion of seven characters (S2 = K7) Conversion of six characters (S2 = K6) [ASCII code] S1+2 S1+1 6 characters (6 bytes) AHEX instruction execution (Conversion result) (Note 1) In the conversion results, only the data for the low byte is stored in the D+1 word. The data for the high byte is left as it is and does not change.
  • Page 399 15.3 F72 AHEX (ASCII Code to Hexadecimal Data Conversion) ASCII code Conversion range n-1 n-2 "0" is entered. (Odd number value specified with n=S2) ■ Reference: ASCII code Higher Lower ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when the conversion range of the number of bytes specified by [S2] exceeds the area R9007...

  • Page 400: F73 Bcda (Bcd Data To Ascii Code Conversion)

    15.4 F73 BCDA (BCD Data to ASCII Code Conversion) 15.4 F73 BCDA (BCD Data to ASCII Code Conversion) Converts up to eight digits of BCD data to ASCII code character strings. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of the area storing the BCD numerical value Area storing data indicating the amount and direction of data to be converted, or constant data Starting number of the area storing the ASCII code of conversion result ■...
  • Page 401 15.4 F73 BCDA (BCD Data to ASCII Code Conversion) ■ Precautions for programming ● The two characters that make up one byte are interchanged when stored. ● Converts two bytes as one section. Forward Reverse direction direction (1)(2) (3)(4) (1)(2) (3)(4) <Example>...
  • Page 402 15.4 F73 BCDA (BCD Data to ASCII Code Conversion) Forward conversion of four bytes (S2 = H0004) [BCD data] S1+1 4 bytes BCDA instruction execution Converted from S1+1 Converted from S1 Reverse conversion of four bytes (S2 = H1004) [BCD data] S1+1 4 bytes BCDA instruction execution...
  • Page 403 15.4 F73 BCDA (BCD Data to ASCII Code Conversion) Higher ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when there is data other than BCD in the data starting with [S1] R9007 Turns ON when the number of bytes specified by [S2] exceeds the area of [S1] R9008...

  • Page 404: F74 Abcd (Ascii Code To Bcd Data Conversion)

    15.5 F74 ABCD (ASCII Code to BCD Data Conversion) 15.5 F74 ABCD (ASCII Code to BCD Data Conversion) Converts an ASCII character string to 4-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of the area storing the ASCII code Area storing data indicating the number of ASCII codes and direction of data to be converted, or constant data Number of the start of the area storing the BCD value that is the result of conversion...
  • Page 405 15.5 F74 ABCD (ASCII Code to BCD Data Conversion) ■ Precautions for programming ● Two ASCII code characters are converted into 1-byte numeric values (two digits). At this time, the upper and lower characters are interchanged. ● Four characters are stored as one segment of data. ●...
  • Page 406 15.5 F74 ABCD (ASCII Code to BCD Data Conversion) Conversion of eight characters (S2 = H0008) [ASCII code] S1+3 S1+2 S1+1 8 characters (8 bytes) (Conversion result) Conversion of seven characters (S2 = H1007) [ASCII code] S1+3 S1+2 S1+1 7 characters (7 bytes) ABCD instruction execution "0"...
  • Page 407 15.5 F74 ABCD (ASCII Code to BCD Data Conversion) ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when there is a character code other than 0 to 9 in the ASCII codes specified by [S1] R9007 Turns ON when the number of characters specified by [S2] exceeds the area of [S1]...

  • Page 408: F75 Bina (16-Bit Binary Data To Ascii Code Conversion)

    15.6 F75 BINA (16-bit Binary Data to ASCII Code Conversion) 15.6 F75 BINA (16-bit Binary Data to ASCII Code Conversion) Converts 16-bit BIN data expressing a decimal number to an ASCII code character string. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area storing the number of bytes of the area storing the conversion results, or constant data...
  • Page 409 15.6 F75 BINA (16-bit Binary Data to ASCII Code Conversion) ■ Precautions for programming ● If the conversion target is a positive number, a sign code (+) is not added in front of the numeric data. ● If the conversion target is a negative number, a sign code (–: H2D) is added in front of the numeric data.
  • Page 410 15.6 F75 BINA (16-bit Binary Data to ASCII Code Conversion) When converting a positive number [16-bit data] K1234 (Conversion result) ASCII code Remainder Range specified in [S2] (6 bytes) ■ Reference: ASCII code Higher Lower ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification.

  • Page 411: F76 Abin (Ascii Code To 16-Bit Binary Data Conversion)

    15.7 F76 ABIN (ASCII Code to 16-bit Binary Data Conversion) 15.7 F76 ABIN (ASCII Code to 16-bit Binary Data Conversion) Converts an ASCII code character string expressing a decimal number to 16-bit BIN data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of the area storing the ASCII code to be converted Area storing the number of bytes of data to be converted, or constant data...
  • Page 412 15.7 F76 ABIN (ASCII Code to 16-bit Binary Data Conversion) ■ Precautions for programming ● Store the ASCII code for conversion in the direction of the final address of the specified area. ● Fill the remaining bytes with"0"(H30) or spaces (H20). ●...
  • Page 413 15.7 F76 ABIN (ASCII Code to 16-bit Binary Data Conversion) Example of conversion of an ASCII code expressing a positive number Example (1) [ASCII code] S1+2 S1+1 ASCII code Remainder Range specified in [S2] Example (2) [ASCII code] S1+2 S1+1 ASCII code Remainder Range specified in [S2]...
  • Page 414 15.7 F76 ABIN (ASCII Code to 16-bit Binary Data Conversion) Higher ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when the number of bytes specified by [S2] exceeds the area of [S1] R9007 Turns ON when the number of bytes specified by [S2] is"0"...

  • Page 415: F77 Dbia (32-Bit Binary Data To Ascii Code Conversion)

    15.8 F77 DBIA (32-bit Binary Data to ASCII Code Conversion) 15.8 F77 DBIA (32-bit Binary Data to ASCII Code Conversion) Converts 32-bit BIN data expressing a decimal number to an ASCII code character string. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of the area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Area storing the number of bytes of the area storing the conversion results, or constant data...
  • Page 416 15.8 F77 DBIA (32-bit Binary Data to ASCII Code Conversion) ■ Precautions for programming ● If the conversion target is a positive number, a sign code (+) is not added in front of the numeric data. ● If the conversion target is a negative number, a sign code (–: H2D) is added in front of the numeric data.
  • Page 417 15.8 F77 DBIA (32-bit Binary Data to ASCII Code Conversion) When converting a positive number [32-bit data] S1+1 K12345678 ASCII code Range specified in [S2] (8 bytes) ■ Reference: ASCII code Higher Lower ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when the number of bytes specified by [S2] exceeds the area specified by [D] R9007 Turns ON when the number of bytes specified by [S2] is"0"...

  • Page 418: F78 Dabi (Ascii Code To 32-Bit Binary Data Conversion)

    15.9 F78 DABI (ASCII Code to 32-bit Binary Data Conversion) 15.9 F78 DABI (ASCII Code to 32-bit Binary Data Conversion) Converts an ASCII code character string expressing a decimal number to 32-bit BIN data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of the area storing the ASCII code to be converted Area storing the numerical values (number of bytes = number of characters) representing the range to...
  • Page 419 15.9 F78 DABI (ASCII Code to 32-bit Binary Data Conversion) ■ Precautions for programming ● Store the ASCII code for conversion in the direction of the final address of the specified area. ● Fill the remaining bytes with"0"(H30) or spaces (H20). ●...
  • Page 420 15.9 F78 DABI (ASCII Code to 32-bit Binary Data Conversion) Example of conversion of an ASCII code expressing a positive number Example (1) [ASCII code] S1+3 S1+2 S1+1 ASCII code Range specified in [S2] (8 bytes) Example (2) [ASCII code] S1+4 S1+3 S1+2...
  • Page 421 15.9 F78 DABI (ASCII Code to 32-bit Binary Data Conversion) Higher ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when the number of bytes specified by [S2] exceeds the area of [S1] Turns ON when the number of bytes specified by [S2] is"0"...

  • Page 422: F80 Bcd (16-Bit Binary Data To Bcd Data Conversion)

    15.10 F80 BCD (16-bit Binary Data to BCD Data Conversion) 15.10 F80 BCD (16-bit Binary Data to BCD Data Conversion) Converts 16-bit binary data to 4-digit BCD. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Target data: Area storing 16-bit data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing 4-digit BCD data following conversion ■...
  • Page 423 15.10 F80 BCD (16-bit Binary Data to BCD Data Conversion) ■ Precautions for programming ● The maximum value of 16-bit data that can be converted is K9999 (H270F). ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the binary data exceeds the range that can be converted to BCD (when...

  • Page 424: F81 Bin (Bcd Data To 16-Bit Binary Data Conversion)

    15.11 F81 BIN (BCD Data to 16-bit Binary Data Conversion) 15.11 F81 BIN (BCD Data to 16-bit Binary Data Conversion) Converts 4-digit BCD data to 16-bit binary data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Target data: Area storing 4-digit BCD data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing converted binary data ■...
  • Page 425 15.11 F81 BIN (BCD Data to 16-bit Binary Data Conversion) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9008 Turns ON if [S] is not BCD data (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 15-39...

  • Page 426: F82 Dbcd (32-Bit Binary Data To Bcd Data Conversion)

    15.12 F82 DBCD (32-bit Binary Data to BCD Data Conversion) 15.12 F82 DBCD (32-bit Binary Data to BCD Data Conversion) Converts 32-bit binary data to 8-digit BCD data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Target data: Area storing 32-bit data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing 8-digit BCD data following conversion ■...

  • Page 427: F83 Dbin (Bcd Data To 32-Bit Binary Data Conversion)

    15.13 F83 DBIN (BCD Data to 32-bit Binary Data Conversion) 15.13 F83 DBIN (BCD Data to 32-bit Binary Data Conversion) Converts 8-digit BCD data to 32-bit binary data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Target data: Area storing 8-digit BCD data, or constant data Storage destination: Area storing converted binary data ■...

  • Page 428: F84 Inv (16-Bit Data Invert)

    15.14 F84 INV (16-bit Data Invert) 15.14 F84 INV (16-bit Data Invert) Inverts 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area that stores the data to invert ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand Index WX WY WR WL SV...

  • Page 429: F85 Neg (16-Bit Data Sign Inversion)

    15.15 F85 NEG (16-bit Data Sign Inversion) 15.15 F85 NEG (16-bit Data Sign Inversion) Takes complement of 2 in hexadecimal data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area for storing original data and its complement of 2 ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...

  • Page 430: F86 Dneg (32-Bit Data Sign Inversion)

    15.16 F86 DNEG (32-bit Data Sign Inversion) 15.16 F86 DNEG (32-bit Data Sign Inversion) Takes complement of 2 in 32-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of area for storing original data and its complement of 2 ■...
  • Page 431 15.16 F86 DNEG (32-bit Data Sign Inversion) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 15-45...

  • Page 432: F87 Abs (Absolute Value Of 16-Bit Data)

    15.17 F87 ABS (Absolute Value of 16-bit Data) 15.17 F87 ABS (Absolute Value of 16-bit Data) Calculates the absolute value of signed 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data for which the absolute value will be calculated ■...

  • Page 433: F88 Dabs (Absolute Value Of 32-Bit Data)

    15.18 F88 DABS (Absolute Value of 32-bit Data) 15.18 F88 DABS (Absolute Value of 32-bit Data) Calculates the absolute value of signed 32-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of the area storing the data for which the absolute value will be calculated ■...

  • Page 434: F89 Ext (Sign Extension)

    15.19 F89 EXT (Sign Extension) 15.19 F89 EXT (Sign Extension) Extends 16-bit data to 32-bit data without changing signs or values. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area where data for sign extension is stored ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 435 15.19 F89 EXT (Sign Extension) Sign bit (0: Positive, 1: Negative) 15 ・ ・ 12 11 ・ ・ 8 7 ・ ・ 4 3 ・ ・ 0 (bit) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 DT0: K-2 (16-bit data) R20:ON...

  • Page 436: F90 Deco (Decode)

    15.20 F90 DECO (Decode) 15.20 F90 DECO (Decode) Decodes the specified data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing conversion data, or constant data Area storing the control data, or constant data Starting address of the area storing the conversion result ■...
  • Page 437 15.20 F90 DECO (Decode) The decoded result for the specified part ("0111"= 7) is stored in the 2 bit area starting from DT20. 15 ・ ・ 12 11 ・ ・ 8 7 ・ ・ 4 3 ・ ・ 0 (bit) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DT20: Bit 7 of the 2...

  • Page 438: Conversion Example

    15.20 F90 DECO (Decode) Effective bit length Occupation length of Effective bit length Value other than for <nL value> decoded result of decoded result effective bit length in D conversion 2 words 32 bits 4 words 64 bits 8 words 128 bits 16 words 256 bits...

  • Page 439: F91 Segt (7-Segment)

    15.21 F91 SEGT (7-segment) 15.21 F91 SEGT (7-segment) Converts specified 16-bit data to 4-digit data for 7-segment display. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing conversion data, or constant data Starting address of the area storing the conversion result ■...
  • Page 440 15.21 F91 SEGT (7-segment) ■ Relationship between display content and data Data for 7-segment display 1 digit [D] Value 7-segment display ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded when conversion results are stored in the area (ER) specified by [D] 15-54...

  • Page 441: F92 Enco (Encode)

    15.22 F92 ENCO (Encode) 15.22 F92 ENCO (Encode) Encodes the specified data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the area storing conversion data Area storing the control data, or constant data Area to store the conversion result ■...
  • Page 442 15.22 F92 ENCO (Encode) 15 ・ ・ 12 11 ・ ・ 8 7 ・ ・ 4 3 ・ ・ 0 DT10: DT11: Bit 8 counted from the least significant bit of DT10 is ON Result output start bit 15 ・ ・ 12 11 ・ ・ 8 7 ・...
  • Page 443 15.22 F92 ENCO (Encode) Specification of nL and length of result Value of nL Effective bit length for conversion 2-bit 4-bit 8-bit (one byte) 16-bit (one word) 32-bit (two words) 64-bit (four words) 128-bit (eight words) 256-bit (16 words) Conversion example When encoding 16-bit data (nL = 4), the content of the conversion data and the encoding result will be as follows.

  • Page 444: F93 Unit (Digit Combine)

    15.23 F93 UNIT (Digit Combine) 15.23 F93 UNIT (Digit Combine) Combines the lower order 4 bits (bits 0 to 3) of 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings The starting address of the area that stores the data to be combined Area storing the number of data to be combined, or constant data Area that stores the combined data ■...
  • Page 445 15.23 F93 UNIT (Digit Combine) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R20 is ON, the lower 4 bits from data register 10, the lower 4 bits from DT11, and the lower 4 bits from DT12 are each stored from the lower order of DT20 4 bits at a time.

  • Page 446: F94 Dist (Digit Distribute)

    15.24 F94 DIST (Digit Distribute) 15.24 F94 DIST (Digit Distribute) Divides 16-bit data into four 4-bit units and distributes it. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 16-bit data to be divided, or constant data Area storing the number of data items to be divided, or constant data Starting address of the area storing each divided digit ■...
  • Page 447 15.24 F94 DIST (Digit Distribute) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R20 turns ON, the data of data register DT10 is divided into 4 bits from the low bit, and 1 digit each is stored in order in the lower 4 bits of data registers DT20 to DT23. ■...

  • Page 448: F96 Src (16-Bit Data Search)

    15.25 F96 SRC (16-bit Data Search) 15.25 F96 SRC (16-bit Data Search) Searches for the specified 16-bit data from the area in the specified range (table). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data to be searched, or constant data Search table starting address Search table ending address ■...
  • Page 449 15.25 F96 SRC (16-bit Data Search) Search data Search table DT10 DT20 0 [S2] [S1] DT21 DT22 DT23 DT39 DT40 20 [S3] Relative position number If DT22, DT39, and DT40 match the searched data, the following occurs. 1. If the number of registers matching the searched data equals 3 "K3"is stored in DT90037.

  • Page 450: F97 Dsrc (32-Bit Data Search)

    15.26 F97 DSRC (32-bit Data Search) 15.26 F97 DSRC (32-bit Data Search) Searches for specified 32-bit data in any area range (table). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data to search for, or constant data (32-bit) Address of the search table starting area (32-bit) Address of the search table ending area (32-bit) ■...
  • Page 451 15.26 F97 DSRC (32-bit Data Search) Search data Search table DT11, DT10 DT21, DT20 0 [S2] [S1] DT23, DT22 F F 1 2 DT25, DT24 DT27, DT26 F F F F F F DT39, DT38 DT41, DT40 10 [S3] If "DT24, DT25", "DT38, DT39", and "DT40, DT41" match the searched data, the following occurs.

  • Page 452: F230 Tmsec (Time Data To Second Conversion)

    15.27 F230 TMSEC (Time data to second conversion) 15.27 F230 TMSEC (Time data to second conversion) Converts the specified time of day data (year, month, day, hour, minute, second) into number of seconds. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data to be converted, or constant data Area to store the conversion result ■...
  • Page 453 15.27 F230 TMSEC (Time data to second conversion) Time data (S) (BCD) (Higher) (Lower) Minutes (H00 to H59) Seconds (H00 to H59) S+1: Day (H01 to H31) Hour (H01 to H23) S+2: Year (H00 to H99) Month (H00 to H12) Seconds data (D) (32-bit integer) (Higher) Seconds data...
  • Page 454 15.27 F230 TMSEC (Time data to second conversion) Time data (S) Second data (D) '01/01/01 01:00:00 H00000E10 '01/01/01 00:00:00 H00015180 2099 '99/12/31 23:59:59 HBA368E7F 2100 '00/01/01 00:00:00 HBA368E80 2100 '00/12/31 23:59:59 HBC19137F ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when a value other than BCD is specified for [S] R9007 R9008...

  • Page 455: F231 Sectm (Second To Time Data Conversion)

    15.28 F231 SECTM (Second to Time Data Conversion) 15.28 F231 SECTM (Second to Time Data Conversion) The specified number of seconds is changed into time data (year/month/day/hour/minute/ second). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the number of seconds (32 bits) Starting area storing the time data ■...
  • Page 456 15.28 F231 SECTM (Second to Time Data Conversion) Seconds data (S) (32 -bit integer) (Lower) Seconds data (H00000000 to HBC19137F) (Higher) S+1: Time of day data (D) (BCD) (Higher) (Lower) Minutes (H00 to H59) Seconds (H00 to H59) D+1: Day (H01 to H31) Hour (H01 to H23) D+2: Year (H00 to H99)
  • Page 457 15.28 F231 SECTM (Second to Time Data Conversion) Second data (D) Time data (S) H00000E10 '01/01/01 01:00:00 H00015180 '01/01/01 00:00:00 HBA368E7F '99/12/31 23:59:59 2099 HBA368E80 '00/01/01 00:00:00 2100 HBC19137F '00/12/31 23:59:59 2100 ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 Turns ON when the number of seconds [S] is [S]≥HBC191380 (number of seconds in 100 R9008...

  • Page 458: F235 Gry (16-Bit Data To Gray Code Conversion)

    15.29 F235 GRY (16-bit Data to Gray Code Conversion) 15.29 F235 GRY (16-bit Data to Gray Code Conversion) Converts the specified 16-bit data to gray code. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data to be converted, or constant data Area to store the conversion result ■...

  • Page 459: Instruction Format

    15.30 F236 DGRY (32-bit Data to Gray Code Conversion) 15.30 F236 DGRY (32-bit Data to Gray Code Conversion) Converts specified 32-bit data to gray code. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area (two word) storing the data to be converted, or constant data Area (two word) to store the conversion result ■...

  • Page 460: F237 Gbin (Gray Code To 16-Bit Data Conversion)

    15.31 F237 GBIN (Gray Code to 16-bit Data Conversion) 15.31 F237 GBIN (Gray Code to 16-bit Data Conversion) Converts the gray code in the specified area to 16-bit binary data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data to be converted, or constant data Area to store the conversion result ■...

  • Page 461: F238 Dgbin (Gray Code To 32-Bit Data Conversion)

    15.32 F238 DGBIN (Gray Code to 32-bit Data Conversion) 15.32 F238 DGBIN (Gray Code to 32-bit Data Conversion) The gray code in the specified area is converted to 32-bit binary data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area (two word) storing the data to be converted, or constant data Area (two words) to store the conversion result ■...
  • Page 462 15.32 F238 DGBIN (Gray Code to 32-bit Data Conversion) Decimal Binary Gray code (Decimal) (Binary) (Gray code) 0000 0000 0000 0011 0000 0000 0000 0010 0000 0000 0000 0100 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0111 0000 0000 0000 0110 0000 0000 0000 0101 0000 0000 0000 0111...

  • Page 463: F240 Colm (Bit Line To Bit Column Conversion)

    15.33 F240 COLM (Bit Line to Bit Column Conversion) 15.33 F240 COLM (Bit Line to Bit Column Conversion) Converts a bit line to a bit column. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Area storing the bit position specification, or constant data Starting address of the area that will be overwritten by the bit column ■...
  • Page 464 15.33 F240 COLM (Bit Line to Bit Column Conversion) e.g. When the specified bit position n = 10 (K10) ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON if 0 ≤ [n] ≤ 15 is not true (ER) Turns ON when the conversion result exceeds the area specified by [D] when stored 15-78...

  • Page 465: F241 Line (Bit Column To Bit Line Conversion)

    15.34 F241 LINE (Bit Column to Bit Line Conversion) 15.34 F241 LINE (Bit Column to Bit Line Conversion) Converts a bit column to a bit line. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of area where bit column will be read Area storing the bit position specification, or constant data Area to store the conversion result ■...
  • Page 466 15.34 F241 LINE (Bit Column to Bit Line Conversion) e.g. When the specified bit position n = 10 (K10) ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON if 0 ≤ [n] ≤ 15 is not true (ER) Turns ON when the conversion range specified by [S] exceeds the area 15-80...

  • Page 467: Data Shift Instruction

    16 Data Shift Instruction 16.1 F100 SHR (16-bit Data Right Shift)...........16-2 16.2 F101 SHL (16-bit Data Left Shift)............16-4 16.3 F102 DSHR (32-bit Data Right Shift) ..........16-6 16.4 F103 DSHL (32-bit Data Left Shift) ...........16-8 16.5 F105 BSR (16-bit Data 1-Digit Right Shift) ........16-10 16.6 F106 BSL (16-bit Data 1-Digit Left Shift) ..........16-12 16.7 F108 BITR (Block Area Bitwise Right Shift)........16-14 16.8 F109 BITL (Block Area Bitwise Left Shift).........16-16...

  • Page 468: F100 Shr (16-Bit Data Right Shift)

    16.1 F100 SHR (16-bit Data Right Shift) 16.1 F100 SHR (16-bit Data Right Shift) Shifts 16-bit data to the right by a specified number of bits. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 16-bit data to be shifted Area storing the number of bits to be shifted, or constant data ■...
  • Page 469 16.1 F100 SHR (16-bit Data Right Shift) (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program Shifts the content of DT0 four bits to the right when internal relay R0 turns ON. The content of bit 3 before the shift is stored in the CY (carry) flag.

  • Page 470: F101 Shl (16-Bit Data Left Shift)

    16.2 F101 SHL (16-bit Data Left Shift) 16.2 F101 SHL (16-bit Data Left Shift) Shifts 16-bit data to the left by the specified number of bits. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 16-bit data to be shifted Area storing the number of bits to be shifted, or constant data ■...
  • Page 471 16.2 F101 SHL (16-bit Data Left Shift) (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R0 turns ON, the content of DT0 shifts four bits to the left. The content of bit 12 before the shift is stored in the CY (carry) flag.

  • Page 472: F102 Dshr (32-Bit Data Right Shift)

    16.3 F102 DSHR (32-bit Data Right Shift) 16.3 F102 DSHR (32-bit Data Right Shift) Shifts 32-bit data (double-word data) n bits to the right. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the double-word data to be shifted (two words) Area storing the number of bits to be shifted, or constant data ■...
  • Page 473 16.3 F102 DSHR (32-bit Data Right Shift) ● For [n], only the lower 8 bits of the 16-bit data are valid. The shift amount can be selected from 1 bit to 255 bits. (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ●...

  • Page 474: F103 Dshl (32-Bit Data Left Shift)

    16.4 F103 DSHL (32-bit Data Left Shift) 16.4 F103 DSHL (32-bit Data Left Shift) Shifts 32-bit data (double-word data) n bits to the left. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the double-word data to be shifted (two words) Area storing the number of bits to be shifted, or constant data ■...
  • Page 475 16.4 F103 DSHL (32-bit Data Left Shift) ● For [n], only the lower 8 bits of the 16-bit data are valid. The shift amount can be selected from 1 bit to 255 bits. (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ●...

  • Page 476: F105 Bsr (16-Bit Data 1-Digit Right Shift)

    16.5 F105 BSR (16-bit Data 1-Digit Right Shift) 16.5 F105 BSR (16-bit Data 1-Digit Right Shift) Shifts 16-bit data one digit (four bits) to the right. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 16-bit data to be shifted ■...
  • Page 477 16.5 F105 BSR (16-bit Data 1-Digit Right Shift) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R0 turns ON, the content of DT0 shifts one digit to the right. The content of bits 0 to 3 before the shift are stored in bits 0 to 3 of DT90014. ■...

  • Page 478: F106 Bsl (16-Bit Data 1-Digit Left Shift)

    16.6 F106 BSL (16-bit Data 1-Digit Left Shift) 16.6 F106 BSL (16-bit Data 1-Digit Left Shift) Shifts 16-bit data one digit (four bits) to the left. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 16-bit data to be shifted ■...
  • Page 479 16.6 F106 BSL (16-bit Data 1-Digit Left Shift) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R0 turns ON, the content of DT0 shifts one digit to the left. The contents of bits 12 to 15 before the shift are stored in bits 0 to 3 of DT90014. ■...

  • Page 480: F108 Bitr (Block Area Bitwise Right Shift)

    16.7 F108 BITR (Block Area Bitwise Right Shift) 16.7 F108 BITR (Block Area Bitwise Right Shift) Shifts a block area to the right in bit units. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the area to be shifted Ending address of the area to be shifted Area storing the number of bits to be shifted, or constant data ■...
  • Page 481 16.7 F108 BITR (Block Area Bitwise Right Shift) ● When the data is shifted to the right, 1. the lower n bits of [D1] before the shift are shifted out. 2. After the shift, the upper n bits of [D2] are filled with 0. ●...

  • Page 482: F109 Bitl (Block Area Bitwise Left Shift)

    16.8 F109 BITL (Block Area Bitwise Left Shift) 16.8 F109 BITL (Block Area Bitwise Left Shift) Shifts a block area left in bit units. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the area to be shifted Ending address of the area to be shifted Area storing the number of bits to be shifted, or constant data ■...
  • Page 483 16.8 F109 BITL (Block Area Bitwise Left Shift) ● When the data is shifted to the left, 1. the upper n bits of [D2] before the shift are shifted out. 2. After the shift, the lower n bits of [D1] are filled with 0. ●...

  • Page 484: F110 Wshr (Block Area 1 Word Right Shift)

    16.9 F110 WSHR (Block Area 1 Word Right Shift) 16.9 F110 WSHR (Block Area 1 Word Right Shift) Shifts the specified data range one word to the right. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the area to be shifted Ending address of the area to be shifted ■...
  • Page 485 16.9 F110 WSHR (Block Area 1 Word Right Shift) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R0 turns ON, the three-word data in DT0 to DT2 is shifted one word to the right. Shift width = 3 words H0212 H0030 H0232...

  • Page 486: F111 Wshl (Block Area 1 Word Left Shift)

    16.10 F111 WSHL (Block Area 1 Word Left Shift) 16.10 F111 WSHL (Block Area 1 Word Left Shift) Data in the specified range is shifted one word to the left. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the area to be shifted Ending address of the area to be shifted ■...
  • Page 487 16.10 F111 WSHL (Block Area 1 Word Left Shift) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program Three-word data from DT0 to DT2 is shifted one word to the left when internal relay R0 turns Shift width = 3 words H0212 H0030 H0232...

  • Page 488: F112 Wbsr (Block Area 1 Digit Right Shift)

    16.11 F112 WBSR (Block Area 1 Digit Right Shift) 16.11 F112 WBSR (Block Area 1 Digit Right Shift) Data in the specified range is shifted 1 digit to the right. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the area to be shifted Ending address of the area to be shifted ■...
  • Page 489 16.11 F112 WBSR (Block Area 1 Digit Right Shift) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R0 is ON, 10 word data of DT0 to DT9 is shifted 1 digit to the right. Shift width 10 words = 40 digits 0 2 1 2 0 0 3 0 0 2 3 2 Shifted out...

  • Page 490: F113 Wbsl (Block Area 1 Digit Left Shift)

    16.12 F113 WBSL (Block Area 1 Digit Left Shift) 16.12 F113 WBSL (Block Area 1 Digit Left Shift) Shifts data in a specified range one digit to the left. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the area to be shifted Ending address of the area to be shifted ■...
  • Page 491 16.12 F113 WBSL (Block Area 1 Digit Left Shift) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When the internal relay R0 is ON, the data of 10 words from DT0 to DT9 is shifted to the left by one digit.
  • Page 492 (MEMO) 16-26 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 493: Data Rotation Instructions

    17 Data Rotation Instructions 17.1 F120 ROR (16-Bit Data Rotation to the Right)........17-2 17.2 F121 ROL (16-Bit Data Rotation to the Left) ........17-4 17.3 F122 RCR (16-bit Data Right Rotation with Carry) ......17-6 17.4 F123 RCL (16-bit Data Left Rotation with Carry) ......17-8 17.5 F125 DROR [32-Bit Data Right Rotation] .........17-10 17.6 F126 DROL (32-bit data left rotation)..........17-12 17.7 F127 DRCR (32-bit Data Right Rotation with Carry) ......17-14...

  • Page 494: F120 Ror (16-Bit Data Rotation To The Right)

    17.1 F120 ROR (16-Bit Data Rotation to the Right) 17.1 F120 ROR (16-Bit Data Rotation to the Right) Rotates the specified 16-bit data to the right. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area targeted for rotation Area storing the number of bits specified to be rotated, or constant data ■...
  • Page 495 17.1 F120 ROR (16-Bit Data Rotation to the Right) (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R0 turns ON, the content of data register DT0 is rotated 4 bits to the right. ■...

  • Page 496: F121 Rol (16-Bit Data Rotation To The Left)

    17.2 F121 ROL (16-Bit Data Rotation to the Left) 17.2 F121 ROL (16-Bit Data Rotation to the Left) Rotates the specified 16-bit data to the left. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area targeted for rotation Area storing the number of bits specified to be rotated, or constant data ■...
  • Page 497 17.2 F121 ROL (16-Bit Data Rotation to the Left) (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R0 turns ON, the content of data register DT0 is rotated 4 bits to the left. ■...

  • Page 498: F122 Rcr (16-Bit Data Right Rotation With Carry)

    17.3 F122 RCR (16-bit Data Right Rotation with Carry) 17.3 F122 RCR (16-bit Data Right Rotation with Carry) Rotate 17 bits of data made up of the specified 16-bit data and the carry flag to the right. ■ Instruction format ■...
  • Page 499 17.3 F122 RCR (16-bit Data Right Rotation with Carry) (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R0 turns ON, the content of data register DT0 is rotated 4 bits to the right. (The CY value immediately before execution is assumed to be 1.) ■...

  • Page 500: F123 Rcl (16-Bit Data Left Rotation With Carry)

    17.4 F123 RCL (16-bit Data Left Rotation with Carry) 17.4 F123 RCL (16-bit Data Left Rotation with Carry) Rotates 17-bit data, consisting of specified 16-bit data with carry flag data added, to the left. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area targeted for rotation Area storing the number of bits specified to be rotated, or constant data...
  • Page 501 17.4 F123 RCL (16-bit Data Left Rotation with Carry) (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R0 turns ON, the content of data register DT0 is rotated 4 bits to the left. (The CY value immediately before execution is assumed to be 1.) ■...

  • Page 502: F125 Dror [32-Bit Data Right Rotation]

    17.5 F125 DROR [32-Bit Data Right Rotation] 17.5 F125 DROR [32-Bit Data Right Rotation] Rotates "n" bits of 32-bit data (double word data) to the right. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area to be rotated (two words) Area storing the number of bits specified to be rotated, or constant data ■...
  • Page 503 17.5 F125 DROR [32-Bit Data Right Rotation] (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ● When [n] = K0, the contents of [D, D+1] and the CY flag do not change. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When the internal relay R0 turns ON, the contents of DT11 and DT10 are rotated 4 bits to the right.

  • Page 504: F126 Drol (32-Bit Data Left Rotation)

    17.6 F126 DROL (32-bit data left rotation) 17.6 F126 DROL (32-bit data left rotation) Rotates 32-bit data (double word data) n bits to the left. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area to be rotated (two words) Area storing the number of bits specified to be rotated, or constant data ■...
  • Page 505 17.6 F126 DROL (32-bit data left rotation) (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ● When [n]=K0, the contents of [D, D+1] and the CY flag do not change. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When the internal relay R0 turns ON, the contents of DT11 and DT10 are rotated 4 bits to the left.

  • Page 506: F127 Drcr (32-Bit Data Right Rotation With Carry)

    17.7 F127 DRCR (32-bit Data Right Rotation with Carry) 17.7 F127 DRCR (32-bit Data Right Rotation with Carry) Rotates 32-bit data (double-word data) n bits to the right together with carry data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area to be rotated (two words) Area storing the number of bits specified to be rotated, or constant data ■...
  • Page 507 17.7 F127 DRCR (32-bit Data Right Rotation with Carry) (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ● When [n] = K0, the contents of [D, D+1] and the CY flag do not change. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R10 turns ON, the contents of DT11 and DT10 are rotated 4 bits to the right.

  • Page 508: F128 Drcl (32-Bit Data Left Rotation With Carry)

    17.8 F128 DRCL (32-bit Data Left Rotation with Carry) 17.8 F128 DRCL (32-bit Data Left Rotation with Carry) Rotates 32-bit data (double-word data) n bits to the left with carry data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area to be rotated (two words) Area storing the number of bits specified to be rotated, or constant data ■...
  • Page 509 17.8 F128 DRCL (32-bit Data Left Rotation with Carry) (Note 1) The bits marked with - are invalid. ● When [n] = K0, the contents of [D, D+1] and the CY flag do not change. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When the internal relay R0 turns ON, the contents of DT11 and DT10 are rotated 4 bits to the left.
  • Page 510 (MEMO) 17-18 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 511: Data Buffer Instruction

    18 Data Buffer Instruction 18.1 F98 CMPR (Compress Shift Read)...........18-2 18.2 F99 CMPW (Compress Shift Write) ..........18-6 18.3 How to Use the FIFO (First-in First-out) Buffer .........18-10 18.4 F115 FIFT (FIFO Buffer Definition) ...........18-11 18.5 F116 FIFR (FIFO Data Read) ............18-14 18.6 F117 FIFW (FIFO Data Write)............18-18 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 18-1...

  • Page 512: F98 Cmpr (Compress Shift Read)

    18.1 F98 CMPR (Compress Shift Read) 18.1 F98 CMPR (Compress Shift Read) Reads the data at the highest address in the specified range and compresses the data upward. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of specified range Final address of specified range Area storing read data ■...

  • Page 513: Application Example

    18.1 F98 CMPR (Compress Shift Read) ● Specify the same type of area for both [D1] and [D2]. Additionally, specify values so that [D1] is equal to or less than [D2]. ● If all of the content in the range specified by [D1] and [D2] is 0, 0 is stored in [D3]. ■...
  • Page 514 18.1 F98 CMPR (Compress Shift Read) 2. Executing the F98 CMPR instruction When data at the final address of the buffer (the area of the specified range) is read, data can be extracted in sequential order, starting from the oldest data. Any remaining data in the buffer is shifted in the direction of the higher addresses, so the oldest data at any point will always be stored at the final address.
  • Page 515 18.1 F98 CMPR (Compress Shift Read) ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when [D1] > [D2] (ER) Turns ON when [D1] and [D2] are not the same type of area WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 18-5...

  • Page 516: F99 Cmpw (Compress Shift Write)

    18.2 F99 CMPW (Compress Shift Write) 18.2 F99 CMPW (Compress Shift Write) Writes data to the starting address in the specified range, and compresses the data upward. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the hexadecimal data or constant data Starting address of specified range Final address of specified range ■...
  • Page 517 18.2 F99 CMPW (Compress Shift Write) ● Specify the same type of area for both [D1] and [D2]. Additionally, specify values so that [D1] is equal to or less than [D2]. ● If the content of [S] is 0, only a compressed shift is carried out. ■...
  • Page 518 18.2 F99 CMPW (Compress Shift Write) 2. Executing the F98 CMPR instruction When data at the final address of the buffer (the area of the specified range) is read, data can be extracted in sequential order, starting from the oldest data. Any remaining data in the buffer is shifted in the direction of the higher addresses, so the oldest data at any point will always be stored at the final address.
  • Page 519 18.2 F99 CMPW (Compress Shift Write) ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when [D1] > [D2] (ER) Turns ON when [D1] and [D2] are not the same type of area WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 18-9...

  • Page 520: How To Use The Fifo (First-In First-Out) Buffer

    18.3 How to Use the FIFO (First-in First-out) Buffer 18.3 How to Use the FIFO (First-in First-out) Buffer The FIFO buffer is a buffer area that stores data in the order it is written, and starts reading in order from the first data stored. It is convenient to use the FIFO buffer as a record of the order of objects on a conveyor line or buffer line.

  • Page 521: F115 Fift (Fifo Buffer Definition)

    18.4 F115 FIFT (FIFO Buffer Definition) 18.4 F115 FIFT (FIFO Buffer Definition) Defines the start and size of the FIFO buffer area. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the size (number of words) of the FIFO buffer, or constant data Starting address for the FIFO buffer area ■...
  • Page 522 18.4 F115 FIFT (FIFO Buffer Definition) FIFO buffer size (n) Store data count (words) FIFO pointer Data storage area Write pointer (n words) (0 to 255/H00 to HFF) Read pointer (0 to 255/H00 to HFF) D+2+n ● When the F115 FIFT instruction is executed, the following are stored as default values: [D] = n (the value specified by the F115 FIFT instruction), [D+1] = K0 and [D+2] = H0000.
  • Page 523 18.4 F115 FIFT (FIFO Buffer Definition) Name Description Turns ON when n = 0 R9008 Turns ON when n > 256 (ER) Turns ON when the final address of the FIFO set according to the FIFO size exceeds the area WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 18-13...

  • Page 524: F116 Fifr (Fifo Data Read)

    18.5 F116 FIFR (FIFO Data Read) 18.5 F116 FIFR (FIFO Data Read) Reads the data from the specified FIFO buffer. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address for the FIFO buffer area Area storing the data read from the FIFO buffer ■...

  • Page 525: Operation Example

    18.5 F116 FIFR (FIFO Data Read) (Note 1) (0) to (n–1) are addresses assigned to the data storage areas. (Note 2) n is the value specified by the F115 FIFT instruction. ▶ is the read pointer. (Note 3) ● The read pointer is stored in the upper eight bits of the third word of the FIFO buffer area. It is indicated by an address in the data storage area.
  • Page 526 18.5 F116 FIFR (FIFO Data Read) [When the read pointer is 2] (H0204) K100 Read pointer K101 DT100 K102 K103 Write pointer FIFR execution Store count (H0304) K100 K101 DT100 K102 K102 K103 Read 1. The content of DT5 indicated by read pointer 2 is transferred to DT100. 2.
  • Page 527 18.5 F116 FIFR (FIFO Data Read) F115 FIFT K256 FIFO definition R9010 Check storage F60 CMP data count R900B F116 FIFR FIFO read ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when the size of the FIFO specified by [S] (n) is n = 0 or n > 256 Turns ON when the number of data stored in the FIFO is 0 R9007 Turns ON when the number of stored data items of the FIFO is larger than the FIFO size...

  • Page 528: F117 Fifw (Fifo Data Write)

    18.6 F117 FIFW (FIFO Data Write) 18.6 F117 FIFW (FIFO Data Write) Writes data to the specified FIFO buffer. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 16-bit data to write to the FIFO buffer, or constant data Starting address for the FIFO buffer area ■...
  • Page 529 18.6 F117 FIFW (FIFO Data Write) FIFO buffer size (n) Store data count (words) (Low) write pointer Write pointer Data storage area (n-2) (n-1) (Note 1) (0) to (n–1) are addresses assigned to the data storage areas. (Note 2) n is the value specified by the F115 FIFT instruction. ●...
  • Page 530 18.6 F117 FIFW (FIFO Data Write) When the write pointer is 3 Write pointer (H0003) Read pointer K100 K101 DT110 K102 K103 K500 Write Write pointer FIFW execution Store count (H0004) K100 K101 DT110 K102 K103 K103 Move write pointer 1.
  • Page 531 18.6 F117 FIFW (FIFO Data Write) Example: If the write pointer is at the end of the FIFO buffer Read pointer K100 K101 K102 K103 K104 Write FIFW execution Store count Write pointer K100 K101 K102 Move write pointer K103 K104 When the F117 FIFW instruction is executed, after data is written to the final address (4) in the buffer, the write pointer becomes the starting address (0).
  • Page 532 18.6 F117 FIFW (FIFO Data Write) Example: When the write pointer has made one complete cycle Read pointer K100 K101 Write K102 K103 K105 K104 FIFW execution K100 Write pointer 1 cycle K101 K102 K103 K104 An error occurs and processing is not carried out. Because the number of data items stored in the FIFO buffer (DT1 = 5) exceeds the size of the FIFO buffer (DT0 = 5), the operation is not executed, and an operation error occurs.
  • Page 533 18.6 F117 FIFW (FIFO Data Write) 2. Execute the F117 FIFW instruction after executing the F116 FIFR instruction. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when the size (n) of the FIFO specified by [D] is n = 0, or when n > 256 R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the number of stored data items of the FIFO is larger than the FIFO size...
  • Page 534 18.6 F117 FIFW (FIFO Data Write) Name Description Turns ON when the write pointer of the FIFO is larger than the FIFO size (n) Turns ON when the FIFO write pointer is K256 (H100) or higher after the data is written 18-24 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 535: Bit Manipulation Instructions

    19 Bit Manipulation Instructions 19.1 F130 BTS (Specified Bit Set) ............19-2 19.2 F131 BTR (Specified Bit Reset)............19-4 19.3 F132 BTI (Specified Bit Inversion) ............19-6 19.4 F133 BTT (Specified Bit Test) ............19-8 19.5 F135 BCU (Count ON Bits in 16-bit Data) ........19-10 19.6 F136 DBCU (Count ON Bits in 32-bit Data)........19-12 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 19-1...

  • Page 536: F130 Bts (Specified Bit Set)

    19.1 F130 BTS (Specified Bit Set) 19.1 F130 BTS (Specified Bit Set) Turns a bit of the specified 16-bit data ON. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area in which bit is to be set Area storing position of bit to be set, or constant data ■...
  • Page 537 19.1 F130 BTS (Specified Bit Set) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 19-3...

  • Page 538: F131 Btr (Specified Bit Reset)

    19.2 F131 BTR (Specified Bit Reset) 19.2 F131 BTR (Specified Bit Reset) Turns OFF a specified bit of 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area where the bit will be reset Area storing the specification of the bit position to be reset, or constant data ■...
  • Page 539 19.2 F131 BTR (Specified Bit Reset) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 19-5...

  • Page 540: F132 Bti (Specified Bit Inversion)

    19.3 F132 BTI (Specified Bit Inversion) 19.3 F132 BTI (Specified Bit Inversion) Inverts a specific bit in 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Target area for bit inversion Area storing the number of the bit to be inverted, or constant data ■...
  • Page 541 19.3 F132 BTI (Specified Bit Inversion) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 19-7...

  • Page 542: F133 Btt (Specified Bit Test)

    19.4 F133 BTT (Specified Bit Test) 19.4 F133 BTT (Specified Bit Test) Tests the specified bit in the specified 16-bit data (to determine whether it is ON or OFF). ■ Instruction format F133 BTT R900B ■ Operands Items Settings Target area for bit test Area storing the numbers of the bits to be tested, or constant data ■...
  • Page 543 19.4 F133 BTT (Specified Bit Test) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When internal relay R0 turns ON, the bit specified by DT2 in the data stored in data register DT0 is determined to either be ON or OFF. If the specified bit is OFF, internal relay R10 turns ON.

  • Page 544: F135 Bcu (Count On Bits In 16-Bit Data)

    19.5 F135 BCU (Count ON Bits in 16-bit Data) 19.5 F135 BCU (Count ON Bits in 16-bit Data) Counts the number of ON bits in the specified 16-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 16-bit data subject to the bit count, or constant data Area storing the number of ON bits ■...
  • Page 545 19.5 F135 BCU (Count ON Bits in 16-bit Data) Name Description (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 19-11...

  • Page 546: F136 Dbcu (Count On Bits In 32-Bit Data)

    19.6 F136 DBCU (Count ON Bits in 32-bit Data) 19.6 F136 DBCU (Count ON Bits in 32-bit Data) Counts the number of ON bits in the specified 32-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the 32-bit data subject to the bit count, or constant data Area storing the number of ON bits ■...
  • Page 547 19.6 F136 DBCU (Count ON Bits in 32-bit Data) Name Description R9008 (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 19-13...
  • Page 548 (MEMO) 19-14 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 549: Special Instructions

    20 Special Instructions 20.1 F138 HMSS (Hour, Minute, Second Data to Second Data Conversion)...................20-2 20.2 F139 SHMS (Second Data to Hour, Minute, Second Data Conversion)...................20-4 20.3 F140 STC (Cy Flag Set) ..............20-6 20.4 F141 CLC (Cy Flag Clear) ..............20-7 20.5 F143 IORF (Partial I/O refresh)............20-8 20.6 F147 PR (Printout) ................20-9 20.7 F148 ERR (Self-Diagnostic Error Set) ..........20-14 20.8 F149 MSG (Character Send to Programming Tool)......20-16...

  • Page 550: F138 Hmss (Hour, Minute, Second Data To Second Data Conversion)

    20.1 F138 HMSS (Hour, Minute, Second Data to Second Data Conversion) 20.1 F138 HMSS (Hour, Minute, Second Data to Second Data Conversion) Converts data representing hours, minutes, and seconds into data representing seconds. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the area storing the two-word data representing hours/minutes/seconds Starting address of the area storing the conversion result (second data) ■...
  • Page 551 20.1 F138 HMSS (Hour, Minute, Second Data to Second Data Conversion) • is composed of 2-word BCD (H constant, maximum 8-digit) data. • It is stored as shown below. Seconds (H00000000 to H99999999) e.g. 35,999,999 seconds D = H9999 D+1 = H3599 Note: As the maximum time data that can be specified is 9999 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds, the actual maximum value for the seconds that will be stored in [D] is 35,999,999 seconds.

  • Page 552: F139 Shms (Second Data To Hour, Minute, Second Data Conversion)

    20.2 F139 SHMS (Second Data to Hour, Minute, Second Data Conversion) 20.2 F139 SHMS (Second Data to Hour, Minute, Second Data Conversion) Converts data representing seconds (up to 8 digits) to data representing hours, minutes, and seconds. ■ Instruction format ■...
  • Page 553 20.2 F139 SHMS (Second Data to Hour, Minute, Second Data Conversion) Note: The maximum value that can be stored in [D] is 9,999 hours, 59 minutes and 59 seconds, so the maximum value that can be specified for the time data for the seconds unit is 35,999,999 seconds.

  • Page 554: F140 Stc (Cy Flag Set)

    20.3 F140 STC (Cy Flag Set) 20.3 F140 STC (Cy Flag Set) Turns the CY flag ON. ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation The CY (carry) flag (R9009) is turned ON. ■ Flag operations Name Description R9009 Turns ON after this instruction is executed (CY) 20-6 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 555: F141 Clc (Cy Flag Clear)

    20.4 F141 CLC (Cy Flag Clear) 20.4 F141 CLC (Cy Flag Clear) Turns the CY flag OFF. ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation The CY (carry) flag (R9009) is turned OFF. ■ Flag operations Name Description R9009 Turns OFF after this instruction is executed (CY) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 20-7...

  • Page 556: F143 Iorf (Partial I/O Refresh)

    20.5 F143 IORF (Partial I/O refresh) 20.5 F143 IORF (Partial I/O refresh) The input or output of a specified range is refreshed. ■ Instruction format Input refresh F143 IORF Output refresh F143 IORF ■ Operands Items Settings The starting word no. of the I/O to be refreshed. The ending word no.

  • Page 557: F147 Pr (Printout)

    20.6 F147 PR (Printout) 20.6 F147 PR (Printout) Outputs text data (ASCII codes) to the printer. ■ Instruction format F147 PR R9033 PR instruction executing flag ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the area storing printout data (ASCII codes) Area for output of printout data ■...
  • Page 558 20.6 F147 PR (Printout) ● Be sure to set the printer control code (LF, CR) as data within the 6-word (12 characters) area above. ● After the start of execution of a printout instruction, 37 scans are required until 12 characters complete output.
  • Page 559 20.6 F147 PR (Printout) ■ Data setting Set the data to be printed out in order from the lower byte of the first word. <Example> Outputting 10 characters"ABCDEFGHIJ"to a printer ■ Printer output using eight-point output ● When only eight output points are being used, connections should be made as shown below, and the program should be set up so that the strobe signal is output from Y7.

  • Page 560: Program Example

    20.6 F147 PR (Printout) Connection example Printer (Centronics connector) DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA8 STROBE Program example ■ Timing chart ASCII code Y0 to Y7 Strobe signal R9033 PR instruction executing Scan count 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 32 33 34 35 36 37 20-12 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 561 20.6 F147 PR (Printout) ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the six words starting with [S] exceed the range of the area R9007 R9008 Turns ON when another F147 (PR) instruction attempts execution while one F147 (PR) (ER) instruction is being executed WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 20-13...

  • Page 562: F148 Err (Self-Diagnostic Error Set)

    20.7 F148 ERR (Self-Diagnostic Error Set) 20.7 F148 ERR (Self-Diagnostic Error Set) Detects self-diagnostic errors using a set detection condition. ■ Instruction format Set self -diagnostic error F148 ERR K100 Clear self -diagnostic error F148 ERR ■ Operands Items Settings Self-diagnostic error code (0, 100 to 299) ■...
  • Page 563 20.7 F148 ERR (Self-Diagnostic Error Set) Items Operation when self-diagnostic error is cleared R9000 Self-diagnostic error flag R9005 Backup battery abnormality flag (current type) R9006 Backup battery abnormality flag (hold type) R9007 Operation error flag (hold type) (ER flag) R9008 Operation error flag (new type) (ER flag) R9109 Memory configuration inconsistency detection flag...

  • Page 564: F149 Msg (Character Send To Programming Tool)

    20.8 F149 MSG (Character Send to Programming Tool) 20.8 F149 MSG (Character Send to Programming Tool) Displays a message on the programming tool. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Message (character constant) ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...

  • Page 565: Instruction Format

    20.9 F150 READ (Shared Memory Read) 20.9 F150 READ (Shared Memory Read) Reads data from the memory of the intelligent unit. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Slot number and bank number specification Read start address of the intelligent unit memory Read word count Starting number of area storing read data ■...
  • Page 566 20.9 F150 READ (Shared Memory Read) Control unit Intelligent unit Control unit Four words ■ Specifying each item ● Specification of slot number and bank number [S1] Specify the slot where the intelligent unit is installed. If the memory has a bank, specify the bank number as well.
  • Page 567 20.9 F150 READ (Shared Memory Read) (higher byte) (lower byte) Slot no.: H00 to H1F (2) For intelligent units with banks Specify the slot number (H constant) where the target intelligent unit is installed and the bank number (H constant). (higher byte) (lower byte) Bank no.: H00 to HFF...

  • Page 568: F151 Wrt (Write To Shared Memory)

    20.10 F151 WRT (Write to Shared Memory) 20.10 F151 WRT (Write to Shared Memory) Writes data into the memory in an intelligent unit. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Slot number and bank number specification Starting number of area storing the write data Number of words to be written Starting address for writing in the memory of the intelligent unit ■...
  • Page 569 20.10 F151 WRT (Write to Shared Memory) Control unit Control unit Intelligent unit 5 words DT10 DT11 DT12 DT13 DT14 ■ Specifying each item ● Specification of slot number and bank number [S1] Specify the slot where the intelligent unit is installed. If the memory has a bank, specify the bank number as well.
  • Page 570 20.10 F151 WRT (Write to Shared Memory) (2) For intelligent units with banks Specify the slot number (H constant) where the target intelligent unit is installed and the bank number (H constant). (higher byte) (lower byte) Bank no.: H00 to HFF Slot no.: H00 to H1F ■...

  • Page 571: F157 Cadd (Calendar Data Addition)

    20.11 F157 CADD (Calendar Data Addition) 20.11 F157 CADD (Calendar Data Addition) Calculates the date and time after a specified amount of time (hours, minutes, and seconds) has elapsed since a certain date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second). ■...
  • Page 572 20.11 F157 CADD (Calendar Data Addition) <Time data> (Higher) (Lower) [S1] Minutes (H00 to H59) Seconds (H00 to H59) [S1+1] Day (H01 to H31) Hour (H01 to H23) [S1]+2 Year (H00 to H99) Month (H00 to H12) + (addition) <Time data> (Higher) (Lower) [S1]...
  • Page 573 20.11 F157 CADD (Calendar Data Addition) DT90054 1992, June, 1 7th 10 hours DT90055 30 minutes 24 seconds DT90056 + (addition) DT10 20 hours 45 minutes later DT11 DT30 1992, June, 1 8th 7 hours DT31 15 minutes 24 seconds DT32 ■...

  • Page 574: F158 Csub (Calendar Data Subtraction)

    20.12 F158 CSUB (Calendar Data Subtraction) 20.12 F158 CSUB (Calendar Data Subtraction) Calculates the date and time a specified amount of time (hours, minutes, and seconds) before a certain date and time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second). ■ Instruction format ■...
  • Page 575 20.12 F158 CSUB (Calendar Data Subtraction) <Time data> (Higher) (Lower) [S1] Minutes (H00 to H59) Seconds (H00 to H59) [S1+1] Day (H01 to H31) Hour (H01 to H23) [S1+2] Year (H00 to H99) Month (H00 to H12) - (subtraction) <Time data> (Higher) (Lower) [S1]...
  • Page 576 20.12 F158 CSUB (Calendar Data Subtraction) DT90054 1992, June, 1 7th 10 hours DT90055 30 minutes 24 seconds DT90056 - (subtraction) 3 hours DT10 30 minutes 30 second earlier DT11 DT30 1992, June, 1 7th 6 hours DT31 59 minutes 54 seconds DT32 ■...
  • Page 577 20.12 F158 CSUB (Calendar Data Subtraction) 2 minutes, 15 seconds Start time 23rd day, 8 hours [S2] 1994, December Start time 30 minutes, 25 seconds [S2] 23rd day, 10 hours 1994, December The data to be subtracted is taken from the starting date and time data as is shown below. 2 minutes, 15 seconds 8 hours...
  • Page 578 20.12 F158 CSUB (Calendar Data Subtraction) Name Description Turns ON when the specified data exceeds the area 20-30 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 579: F160 Dsqr (32-Bit Data Square Root)

    20.13 F160 DSQR (32-bit Data Square Root) 20.13 F160 DSQR (32-bit Data Square Root) Calculates the square root of the specified 32-bit data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the data for square root calculation, or constant data Area storing the calculated square root ■...
  • Page 580 20.13 F160 DSQR (32-bit Data Square Root) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9008 ON when the data specified by [S] is a negative value (ER) 20-32 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 581: Serial Communication Instructions

    21 Serial Communication Instructions 21.1 F145 SEND / F146 RECV Instructions: Common Items (Serial Communication) ..................21-2 21.2 F145 SEND [MEWTOCOL Master Send (Serial Communication)]...21-4 21.3 F146 REC [MEWTOCOL Master Receiver (Serial Communication)] ...................21-8 21.4 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] ...............21-12 21.5 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] ..........21-17...

  • Page 582: F145 Send / F146 Recv Instructions: Common Items (Serial Communication)

    21.1 F145 SEND / F146 RECV Instructions: Common Items (Serial Communication) 21.1 F145 SEND / F146 RECV Instructions: Common Items (Serial Communication) ■ System register settings Use tool software to set the communication mode of the COM port used. Mode System register No.

  • Page 583: Other Restrictions

    21.1 F145 SEND / F146 RECV Instructions: Common Items (Serial Communication) (Note 1) The numbers inside the parentheses indicate the serial numbers of devices that are compatible with the existing products FP0R, FP-X, and FPsigma. ■ Timeout period setting ● If the error code is H73, it means that a timeout has occurred while waiting for a response. ●...

  • Page 584: F145 Send [Mewtocol Master Send (Serial Communication)]

    21.2 F145 SEND [MEWTOCOL Master Send (Serial Communication)] 21.2 F145 SEND [MEWTOCOL Master Send (Serial Communication)] ■ Instruction format For Type without Ethernet Function For Type with Ethernet Function ● When using both the serial communication and Ethernet communication within a program, specify the serial communication port using the F469 (UNITSEL) instruction before executing the F145 (SEND) instruction.
  • Page 585 21.2 F145 SEND [MEWTOCOL Master Send (Serial Communication)] ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Index Operand modifier (Note 1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●...
  • Page 586 21.2 F145 SEND [MEWTOCOL Master Send (Serial Communication)] Destination unit number selection On unit firmware Ver. 1.8 or later, adding a specification of HEE (238) for the destination unit number allows for communication to be carried out regardless of destination unit number. ■...
  • Page 587 21.2 F145 SEND [MEWTOCOL Master Send (Serial Communication)] Name Description Turns ON when the [D] device No. is not 0. Turns ON when a communication cassette is not attached to the target COM port. WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 21-7...

  • Page 588: F146 Rec [Mewtocol Master Receiver (Serial Communication)]

    21.3 F146 REC [MEWTOCOL Master Receiver (Serial Communication)] 21.3 F146 REC [MEWTOCOL Master Receiver (Serial Communication)] ■ Instruction format For Type without Ethernet Function For Type with Ethernet Function ● When using both the serial communication and Ethernet communication within a program, specify the serial communication port using the F469 (UNITSEL) instruction before executing the F146 (RECV) instruction.
  • Page 589 21.3 F146 REC [MEWTOCOL Master Receiver (Serial Communication)] ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Index Operand modifier (Note 1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●...
  • Page 590 21.3 F146 REC [MEWTOCOL Master Receiver (Serial Communication)] Destination unit number selection On unit firmware Ver. 1.8 or later, adding a specification of HEE (238) for the destination unit number allows for communication to be carried out regardless of destination unit number. ■...
  • Page 591 21.3 F146 REC [MEWTOCOL Master Receiver (Serial Communication)] Name Description Turns ON when a communication cassette is not attached to the target COM port. WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 21-11...

  • Page 592: F145 Send [Modbus Master Send: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)]

    21.4 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] 21.4 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] ■ Instruction format For Type without Ethernet Function For Type with Ethernet Function ● When using both the serial communication and Ethernet communication within a program, specify the serial communication port using the F469 (UNITSEL) instruction before executing the F145 (SEND) instruction.
  • Page 593 21.4 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] Constant Index Operand modifier (Note 1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● (Note 1) A character constant cannot be specified. ■...
  • Page 594 21.4 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] ■ Specifying a COM port number for the F469 (UNITSEL) instruction (only for the type with Ethernet Function) Specifying HE in the upper four bits of [S1] of F145 (SEND) enables operand [S2] for the F469 (UNITSEL) instruction.
  • Page 595 21.4 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] [F145(SEND), H1607, WR3, H7788, K1] (Note 1) Reads WR3 word data and sets it as write data. Command 15 (force multiple coils) ● Example 3) Transfer from COM1 of 64 bits of data from WR3 0th bit to WR6 Fth bit to bit address H7788 of unit number 7 [F145(SEND), H1507, WR3, H7788, K64] [S1]:...
  • Page 596 21.4 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] Command 16 (preset multiple registers) ● Example 4) Transfer from COM1 of 3 words of data from DT3 to DT5 to address H7788 in unit number 7 [F145(SEND), H1607, DT3, H7788, K3] (Note 1) If multiple points are specified for n, the command will be corrected automatically.

  • Page 597: F146 Recv [Modbus Master Receiver: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)]

    21.5 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] 21.5 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] ■ Instruction format For Type without Ethernet Function For Type with Ethernet Function ● When using both the serial communication and Ethernet communication within a program, specify the serial communication port using the F469 (UNITSEL) instruction before executing the F146 (RECV) instruction.
  • Page 598 21.5 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] Constant Index Operand modifier (Note 1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●...
  • Page 599 21.5 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] [S2] of F469 (UNITSEL) Port number COM0 COM1 COM2 ■ MODBUS command specification example Command 01 (read coil state) ● Example 1) Reading 1 bit from unit number 17 bit address H7788 connected to COM1, and writing to master unit DT100 bit 0 [F146(RECV), H1111, H7788, K1, DT100] ●...
  • Page 600 21.5 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] Command 02 (read input state) ● Example 3) Reading 1 bit from unit number 17 bit address H7788 connected to COM1, and writing to master unit DT100 bit 0 [F146(RECV), H1211, H7788, K1, DT100] ●...
  • Page 601 21.5 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] Command 04 (read input register) ● Example 6) Reading 6 words from unit number 17 address H7788 connected to COM1, and writing to master unit starting at DT100 [F146(RECV), H1411, H7788, K6, DT100] ■...

  • Page 602: F145 Send [Modbus Master Send: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)]

    21.6 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] 21.6 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] ■ Instruction format For Type without Ethernet Function For Type with Ethernet Function ● When using both the serial communication and Ethernet communication within a program, specify the serial communication port using the F469 (UNITSEL) instruction before executing the F145 (SEND) instruction.
  • Page 603 21.6 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Index Operand modifier (Note 1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●...
  • Page 604 [S2] of F469 (UNITSEL) Port number COM0 COM1 COM2 ● This is convenient to write data into Panasonic’s PLC via MODBUS RTU. ● For MODBUS reference Nos. and device Nos., see "Device No. Correspondence Table". ■ MODBUS command specification example Sending command 05 (single Y/R write) ●...
  • Page 605 21.6 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] [S1+1]: DT11 H0 fixed COM port selection Unit no. (H00 to H63) (0 to 99) [S1]: DT10 (DT10=8100H, DT11=1007H) MODBUS command [S2]: WR3 (WR3=0007H) Slave address [D]: WY0 [n]: K1 Command (05H) Coil number (H)
  • Page 606 21.6 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] [F145(SEND), DT10, WR3, WY0, K0] [S1]: DT10 Transfer in Specifies the send word units word count (H1 to H7F) [S1+1]: DT11 H0 fixed COM port selection Unit no. (H00 to H63) (0 to 99) [S1]: DT10 (DT10=0004H, DT11=1007H) [S2]: WR3 (WR3=3210H...
  • Page 607 21.6 F145 SEND [MODBUS Master Send: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] [S1]: DT11 H0 fixed Unit no. (H00 to H63) COM port selection (0 to 99) [S1]: DT10 (DT10=0003H, DT11=1007H) [S2]: WR3 (WR3=0011H MODBUS command WR4=2233H Slave address WR5=4455H) [D]: DT0 Command (10H) [n]: K500...

  • Page 608: F146 Recv [Modbus Master Receiver: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)]

    21.7 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] 21.7 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] ■ Instruction format For Type without Ethernet Function For Type with Ethernet Function ● When using both the serial communication and Ethernet communication within a program, specify the serial communication port using the F469 (UNITSEL) instruction before executing the F146 (RECV) instruction.
  • Page 609 21.7 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Index Operand modifier (Note 1) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●...
  • Page 610 S1=K0 (serial communication port) and S2=K1 (COM1). [S2] of F469 (UNITSEL) Port number COM0 COM1 COM2 ● This is convenient to read data from Panasonic PLC via MODBUS-RTU. ● For MODBUS reference Nos. and device Nos., see "Device No. Correspondence Table". ■ MODBUS command specification example Sending command 01 (Y/R coil read) ●...
  • Page 611 21.7 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] [F146(RECV), DT10, WY0, K1, DT100] [S1]: DT10 H0 fixed Transfer in Master unit bit no. Partner unit bit no. bit units (H0 to HF) (H0 to HF) (Note 1) When reading only 1 bit with command 01, set [S1] transfer method specification to bit units (H8).
  • Page 612 21.7 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] Sending command 02 (X contact reading) ● Example 3) Sending command from COM1 to read 1 bit (X17) from destination unit number 17 and to transfer read bit data to 5th bit of master unit DT100 [F146(RECV), DT10, WX0, K1, DT100] [S1]: DT10...
  • Page 613 21.7 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] (Note 1) When reading word units with command 02, set [S1] transfer method specification to bit units (H0). (Note 2) The read start number specifies the read location coil number. (Destination unit: X10) (Note 3) The read number will be the specified number of words ×...
  • Page 614 21.7 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] [S1+1]: DT11 H0 fixed COM port selection Unit no. (H01 to H63) (1 to 99) [S1]: DT10 (DT10=0006H, DT11=1011H) MODBUS command [S2]: WL0 Slave address [n]: K20 [D]: DT100 Command (04H) Read start number (H) Read start number (L)
  • Page 615 21.7 F146 RECV [MODBUS Master Receiver: No Function Code Specification (Serial Communication)] ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the [S1] / [S1+1] control data value is outside the specified range. Turns ON when the [S2] or [D] area is exceeded, if the number of words specified in [S1] is taken during transfer in word units.

  • Page 616: F159 Mtrn [General-Purpose Communication Instructions (Serial Communication)]

    21.8 F159 MTRN [General-purpose Communication Instructions (Serial Communication)] 21.8 F159 MTRN [General-purpose Communication Instructions (Serial Communication)] ■ Instruction format For Type without Ethernet Function For Type with Ethernet Function ● When using both the serial communication and Ethernet communication within a program, specify the serial communication port using the F469 (UNITSEL) instruction before executing the F159 (MTRN) instruction.
  • Page 617 21.8 F159 MTRN [General-purpose Communication Instructions (Serial Communication)] ■ Outline of operation Data is sent or received with an external device connected to the COM port. F159 (MTRN) instruction has the following three functions. Items Description In the data register starting with [S], data to be sent to an external device is set as a table in Send advance.
  • Page 618 21.8 F159 MTRN [General-purpose Communication Instructions (Serial Communication)] ［D］ Port number COM0 COM1 COM2 Port number specified for the F469 (UNITSEL) instruction ■ Creation of send data table [S] ● Send data is stored as follows in a given memory area (e.g. data register DT). The number of send data bytes [n] is automatically added to the starting word.
  • Page 619 21.8 F159 MTRN [General-purpose Communication Instructions (Serial Communication)] ■ Operations when data is received When the reception done flag is OFF, operation takes place as follows when data is sent from an external device. Items Description Received data is stored in the receive buffer area (two words) in low byte order. Storage of receive The terminator of the received data is stored in the receive buffer after removing data...
  • Page 620 21.8 F159 MTRN [General-purpose Communication Instructions (Serial Communication)] Example 2 Send data: ABCDEFGH+CR+LF ● When data with CR+LF as terminator is received, send data with a size that is smaller by more than one byte than the receive buffer capacity. ■...

  • Page 621: Ethernet Communication Instructions

    22 Ethernet Communication Instructions 22.1 F145 SEND/F146 RECV Common Instruction Items (Ethernet Communication) ..................22-2 22.2 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MEWTOCOL Master)].....22-4 22.3 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MEWTOCOL Master)] ..22-7 22.4 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MODBUS Master: Function Code Specification)] ................22-10 22.5 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MODBUS Master: Function Code Specification)] ................22-12...

  • Page 622: F145 Send/F146 Recv Common Instruction Items (Ethernet Communication)

    SEND / RECV done flag turns ON. Also, an error code is stored in the SEND / RECV done code. For details of error codes, refer to the following table. ● To communicate with FP0H or FP7, specify"H1"for the partner station number. The destination is determined by the IP address.
  • Page 623 22.1 F145 SEND/F146 RECV Common Instruction Items (Ethernet Communication) ■ Special relays / special data registers User connection Name SEND / RECV instruction R9363 R936B R9373 R937B R9383 R938B R9393 R939B R9403 executable flag SEND / RECV R9364 R936C R9374 R937C R9384 R938C...

  • Page 624: F145 Send [Data Send Instruction (Mewtocol Master)]

    22.2 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MEWTOCOL Master)] 22.2 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MEWTOCOL Master)] ■ Instruction format (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No. 1) using F469 (UNITSEL) instruction. ■...
  • Page 625 22.2 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MEWTOCOL Master)] Transfer in word units [S1]： Transfer in Specify the number of sent words word units MEWTOCOL-COM：H001 to H1FB（1 to 507） MEWTOCOL-DAT：H001 to H3FC（1 to 1020） Transfer in bit units [S1]: H0 fixed Transfer in Destination bit no.
  • Page 626 22.2 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MEWTOCOL Master)] Name Description When the device number of [D] is not 0 Word unit ● When [n] is not in the range from 0 to 99999 when [D] is DT/LD ● When [n] is not in the range from 0 to 9999 when [D] is WY/WR/WL/SV/EV Bit unit ●...

  • Page 627: F146 Recv [Data Receive Instruction (Mewtocol Master)]

    22.3 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MEWTOCOL Master)] 22.3 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MEWTOCOL Master)] ■ Instruction format (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No. 1) using F469 (UNITSEL) instruction. ■...
  • Page 628 22.3 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MEWTOCOL Master)] Specify data quantity in the case of transmission in word units, and specify the location of target bits in the case of transmission in bit units. Transfer in word units [S1]： Specify the number of received words Transfer in MEWTOCOL-COM：H001 to H1FD（1 to 509）...
  • Page 629 22.3 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MEWTOCOL Master)] Name Description When the [S2] or [D] area is exceeded, if the number of words specified in [S1] is taken during transfer in word units When [S2]+[n] exceeds the [S2] area When the [S2] device number is not 0 Word unit ●...

  • Page 630: F145 Send [Data Send Instruction (Modbus Master: Function Code Specification)]

    22.4 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MODBUS Master: Function Code Specification)] 22.4 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MODBUS Master: Function Code Specification)] ■ Instruction format (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No.
  • Page 631 22.4 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MODBUS Master: Function Code Specification)] ● Send data specified by [S2] is sent to the MODBUS address specified by [D], using a MODBUS command. (MODBUS function code 05, 06) ■ [S1]: Specify the port number/sending command/partner unit ●...

  • Page 632: F146 Recv [Data Receive Instruction (Modbus Master: Function Code Specification)]

    22.5 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MODBUS Master: Function Code Specification)] 22.5 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MODBUS Master: Function Code Specification)] ■ Instruction format (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No.
  • Page 633 22.5 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MODBUS Master: Function Code Specification)] ■ [S1]: Specify the port number/sending command/partner unit ● Specify a COM port As a LAN port, specify HE (Ethernet communication). ● Set a sending command H1, H2, H3 or H4 can be specified. H1: Read coil state (01) H2: Read input state (02) H3: Read hold register (03)

  • Page 634: F145 Send [Data Send Instruction (Modbus Master: No Function Code Specification)]

    22.6 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MODBUS Master: No Function Code Specification)] 22.6 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MODBUS Master: No Function Code Specification)] ■ Instruction format (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No.
  • Page 635 22.6 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MODBUS Master: No Function Code Specification)] Specify data quantity in the case of transmission in word units, and specify the location of target bits in the case of transmission in bit units. Transfer in word units [S1]: Transfer in Specify the number of transferred words...
  • Page 636 22.6 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MODBUS Master: No Function Code Specification)] Name Description When the device number of [D] is not 0 When the [D] area is DT during transfer in bit units When the operation mode of the specified user connection is other than MODBUS-TCP 22-16 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...
  • Page 637 22.7 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MODBUS Master: No Function Code Specification)] 22.7 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MODBUS Master: No Function Code Specification)] ■ Instruction format (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No.
  • Page 638 22.7 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MODBUS Master: No Function Code Specification)] Specify data quantity in the case of transmission in word units, and specify the location of target bits in the case of transmission in bit units. Transfer in word units [S1]: Specify the number of received words Transfer in word units...
  • Page 639 22.7 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MODBUS Master: No Function Code Specification)] Name Description When the [S2] area is DT/WL/LD during transfer in bit units When the operation mode of the specified user connection is other than MODBUS-TCP WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 22-19...

  • Page 640: F145 Send [Data Send Instruction (Mc Protocol Master)]

    22.8 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MC Protocol Master)] 22.8 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MC Protocol Master)] ■ Instruction format (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No. 1) using F469 (UNITSEL) instruction. ■...
  • Page 641 22.8 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MC Protocol Master)] ■ Specifying [S1] [S1]: Transfer units H0 fixed Specifies Ethernet H0: Bit data Master unit bit communication HF: Word data (H0 to HF) ● For bit data transfer, it is necessary to specify the bit No. of the master unit. ●...
  • Page 642 22.8 F145 SEND [Data Send Instruction (MC Protocol Master)] Code Timing of occurrence Command search: There is no command that matches the receive data command in the MC C059 protocol command table. C059 The subcommand is outside the specified range. C05B The device code is outside the specified range.

  • Page 643: F146 Recv [Data Receive Instruction (Mc Protocol Master)]

    22.9 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MC Protocol Master)] 22.9 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MC Protocol Master)] ■ Instruction format (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No. 1) using F469 (UNITSEL) instruction. ■...
  • Page 644 22.9 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MC Protocol Master)] ■ Specifying [S1] [S1]: Transfer units H0 fixed Specifies Ethernet H0: Bit data Master unit bit communication HF: Word data (H0 to HF) ● For bit data transfer, it is necessary to specify the bit No. of the master unit. ●...
  • Page 645 22.9 F146 RECV [Data Receive Instruction (MC Protocol Master)] Device specified by [D] Transfer Number of sent Remarks method data [n] 1-Bit device: Bit transfer 1 to 4054 When the number of receive data is an odd number, a four-bit dummy X, Y, R, L code H0 is added.

  • Page 646: F159 Mtrn (General-Purpose Communication Instruction)

    22.10 F159 MTRN (General-purpose Communication Instruction) 22.10 F159 MTRN (General-purpose Communication Instruction) ■ Instruction format (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No. 1) using F469 (UNITSEL) instruction. ■ Operands Items Settings Starting area (data register) of the data table Area storing the number of bytes of data to be sent, or constant data...

  • Page 647: Ethernet Settings

    22.10 F159 MTRN (General-purpose Communication Instruction) ■ Ethernet Settings ● It is necessary to set the operation mode setting to"General-Purpose Communication"in user connection settings. ● It is necessary to match the port No. and IP address with the connecting external device in user connection settings.
  • Page 648 22.10 F159 MTRN (General-purpose Communication Instruction) ■ Creation of send data table [S] Send data is stored as follows in a given memory area (e.g. data register DT). The number of send data bytes [n] is automatically added to the starting word. Sent data should be stored in [S +1] and after.
  • Page 649 22.10 F159 MTRN (General-purpose Communication Instruction) Stores the received byte count each time data is stored. DT200 DT201 H42(B) H41(A) H44(D) H43(C) DT202 Received data is stored in order from the lower byte. Binary data can also be received. H46(F) H45(E) DT203 DT204...
  • Page 650 (MEMO) 22-30 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 651: Sampling Trace Instructions

    23 Sampling Trace Instructions 23.1 Sampling Trace.................23-2 23.2 F155 SMPL (Sample Set Data) ............23-3 23.3 F156 STRG (Sampling Stop Trigger)..........23-4 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 23-1...

  • Page 652: Sampling Trace

    23.1 Sampling Trace 23.1 Sampling Trace This is a function used to sample the ON/OFF status of registered contacts and the data stored in the registers, either periodically or when the appropriate conditions have been established, and store the results in memory. This function can be used to confirm changes in the data. ●...

  • Page 653: F155 Smpl (Sample Set Data)

    23.2 F155 SMPL (Sample Set Data) 23.2 F155 SMPL (Sample Set Data) Performs sampling when a sampling trace is executed. ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation ● During a sampling trace, sampling is performed on the specified data (contacts and registers), and the executed data content is stored in the sampling trace memory.

  • Page 654: F156 Strg (Sampling Stop Trigger)

    23.3 F156 STRG (Sampling Stop Trigger) 23.3 F156 STRG (Sampling Stop Trigger) Applies a stop command trigger during sampling trace execution. ■ Instruction format ■ Outline of operation ● This instruction applies a sampling trace stop command trigger. When the trigger is applied, the sampling trace is stopped after sampling of the specified delay count is performed.

  • Page 655: High-Speed Counter / Pwm Output Instructions

    24 High-speed Counter / PWM Output Instructions 24.1 [F0 MV] High-speed Counter Control Instruction ......24-2 24.2 F1 DMV (Pulse Output Elapsed Value Write/Read)......24-4 24.3 [F165 CAM0] High-speed Counter Cam Control Instruction.....24-5 24.4 [F166 HC1S] High-speed Counter Target Value Match ON Instruction [F167 HC1R] High-speed Counter Target Value Match OFF Instruction ..................24-10 24.5 [F173 PWMH] PWM Output Instruction (Frequency Specification) ..24-12...

  • Page 656: F0 Mv] High-Speed Counter Control Instruction

    24.1 [F0 MV] High-speed Counter Control Instruction 24.1 [F0 MV] High-speed Counter Control Instruction Performs the controls such as the software reset, disabling the count and clearing the high- speed counter instruction. ■ Instruction format DT90052 （ ） F0 MV DT90052 F0 MV ■...
  • Page 657 24.1 [F0 MV] High-speed Counter Control Instruction FP0H mode FPsigma mode ● When controlling the above functions using external inputs, arbitrary inputs can be allocated. ■ Example of program The following example shows the program for performing the software reset of the high-speed counter CH0 using the input X7.

  • Page 658: F1 Dmv (Pulse Output Elapsed Value Write/Read)

    24.2 F1 DMV (Pulse Output Elapsed Value Write/Read) 24.2 F1 DMV (Pulse Output Elapsed Value Write/Read) Writes and reads the elapsed value of the high-speed counter. ■ Instruction format F1 DMV K3000 DT90400 （ ） F1 DMV DT90400 DT100 （ ）...

  • Page 659: F165 Cam0] High-Speed Counter Cam Control Instruction

    24.3 [F165 CAM0] High-speed Counter Cam Control Instruction 24.3 [F165 CAM0] High-speed Counter Cam Control Instruction Performs the cam output up to a maximum of 32 points (ON/OFF) according to the elapsed value of the high-speed counter. ■ Instruction format （...
  • Page 660 24.3 [F165 CAM0] High-speed Counter Cam Control Instruction ■ Upper limit control With the F165 (CAM0) instruction, the control with a specified upper limit can be performed. The settings for enabling/disabling the upper limit control and the upper limit are specified in the data table.
  • Page 661 24.3 [F165 CAM0] High-speed Counter Cam Control Instruction Operand Settings Description S+(m-1)x4+12 Settable range: (Note 4) Upper limit S+(m-1)x4+13 K1 to K2147483646 (H1 to H7FFFFFFE) (Note 1) When specifying the output relay (Y), values are also output to the CPU output as well as operation memories.
  • Page 662 24.3 [F165 CAM0] High-speed Counter Cam Control Instruction ON set value < OFF set value ON set value > OFF set value ON set value = OFF set value When the elapsed value is larger When the elapsed value is than or equal to the ON set value smaller than the ON set value and smaller than the OFF set...
  • Page 663 24.3 [F165 CAM0] High-speed Counter Cam Control Instruction ● For details of the allocations of I/O and flags, refer to "38.5.4 When Using High-speed Counter Function". ● For details of the FPsigma mode, refer to "38.6 FPsigma Mode". WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 24-9...

  • Page 664: F166 Hc1S] High-Speed Counter Target Value Match On Instruction [F167 Hc1R] High-Speed Counter Target Value Match Off Instruction

    24.4 [F166 HC1S] High-speed Counter Target Value Match ON Instruction [F167 HC1R] High-speed Counter Target Value Match OFF Instruction 24.4 [F166 HC1S] High-speed Counter Target Value Match ON Instruction [F167 HC1R] High-speed Counter Target Value Match OFF Instruction Turns on or off the specified output when the elapsed value of the high-speed counter matches the target value set by the operand.
  • Page 665 24.4 [F166 HC1S] High-speed Counter Target Value Match ON Instruction [F167 HC1R] High-speed Counter Target Value Match OFF Instruction ■ Precautions during programming ● The high-speed counter control flag turns on until the value matches the target value after the execution condition of the instruction has turned on. During this processing, the high- speed counter instruction F165 (CAM0)/F166 (HC1S)/F167 (HC1R) cannot be executed for the high-speed counter of the same channel.

  • Page 666: F173 Pwmh] Pwm Output Instruction (Frequency Specification)

    For the output frequencies K70001 to K100000, Setting range: K0 to K1000 (0% to 100%) Channel nos. used for PWM output: FP0H mode: 0 (CH0: Y0), 1 (CH1: Y3), 2 (CH2: Y8), 3 (CH3: YB) FPsigma mode: 0 (CH0: Y0), 2 (CH2: Y3) ■...
  • Page 667 24.5 [F173 PWMH] PWM Output Instruction (Frequency Specification) ● When rewriting during RUN is performed during the operation, the PWM output stops while a program is being rewritten. ■ Example of program The following sample shows the program for performing the PWM output with 10 kHz and the duty ratio of 50% from CH0 (Y0).

  • Page 668: F173 Pwmh] Pwm Output Instruction (Control Code Specification)

    For the control codes K28 to K30, Setting range: K0 to K1000 (0% to 100%) Channel nos. used for PWM output: FP0H mode: 0 (CH0: Y0), 1 (CH1: Y3), 2 (CH2: Y8), 3 (CH3: YB) FPsigma mode: 0 (CH0: Y0), 2 (CH2: Y3) ■...

  • Page 669: Control Code

    24.6 [F173 PWMH] PWM Output Instruction (Control Code Specification) ■ Control code Frequency Frequency Resolutio Cycle (ms) Resolution Cycle (ms) (Hz) (Hz) 666.67 2000.0 0.50 500.00 3000.0 0.33 250.00 6000.0 0.17 166.67 12500.0 0.08 125.00 15000.0 0.067 10.0 100.00 20000.0 0.050 1000 20.0...
  • Page 670 (MEMO) 24-16 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 671: Character String Instructions

    25 Character String Instructions 25.1 F95 ASC (Character Constant to ASCII Code Conversion) .....25-2 25.2 F250 BTOA (Multiple Binary Data to ASCII Data String Conversion)...................25-5 25.3 F251 ATOB (Multiple ASCII Data Strings to Binary Data Conversion)...................25-11 25.4 F252 ACHK (Multiple ASCII Data Strings ASCII Code Check)..25-18 25.5 F253 SSET (Character Constant →...

  • Page 672: F95 Asc (Character Constant To Ascii Code Conversion)

    25.1 F95 ASC (Character Constant to ASCII Code Conversion) 25.1 F95 ASC (Character Constant to ASCII Code Conversion) Converts the specified character constants into ASCII codes. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Character constants (12 characters) Number at the start of the area storing the ACSII codes ■...
  • Page 673 25.1 F95 ASC (Character Constant to ASCII Code Conversion) When converting one letter (A), there are three possible input methods. 1. At the start of the specified character constants (1st character) 2. At the end of the specified character constants (12th character) 3.
  • Page 674 25.1 F95 ASC (Character Constant to ASCII Code Conversion) ■ Reference: JIS8 code table Column (DEL) (SP) ｰ タ ミ Undefined (SOH) 。 ア チ ム (STX) " 「 イ ツ メ (ETX) 」 ウ テ モ (EOT) 、 エ ト...

  • Page 675: F250 Btoa (Multiple Binary Data To Ascii Data String Conversion)

    25.2 F250 BTOA (Multiple Binary Data to ASCII Data String Conversion) 25.2 F250 BTOA (Multiple Binary Data to ASCII Data String Conversion) Converts 16-bit/32-bit binary data to an ASCII code character string. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Control character string Starting number of area storing binary data Conversion method Starting number of the area storing the ASCII code of conversion result...
  • Page 676 25.2 F250 BTOA (Multiple Binary Data to ASCII Data String Conversion) (Note 1) Details of normal and reverse directions are described later Specifying the conversion method [n] Example of converting 16-bit data (K1234 and K56) to decimal ASCII codes S2+1 ←Address of register F F C 8 0 4 D 2...
  • Page 677 25.2 F250 BTOA (Multiple Binary Data to ASCII Data String Conversion) ● Number of digits in ASCII data When the number of digits of the ASCII data is larger than the converted result, a "_" (space) is stored before the data. •...
  • Page 678 25.2 F250 BTOA (Multiple Binary Data to ASCII Data String Conversion) DT12,13 = K 56789 Number of converted data is "2", starting position for storage is "1", and size of the storage area is "7" ● Converting 16-bit data (H0123 and H89AB) to hexadecimal ASCII data DT10 = H 123 →...
  • Page 679 25.2 F250 BTOA (Multiple Binary Data to ASCII Data String Conversion) For the reverse direction (when "16+H" is "16-H") ● Converting 32-bit data (H00000123 and H0089ABCD) to hexadecimal ASCII data (normal direction) DT10,11 = H 123 → "230100CDAB89" DT12,13 = H 89ABCD Number of converted data is "2", starting position for storage is "0", and size of the storage area is "6"...
  • Page 680 25.2 F250 BTOA (Multiple Binary Data to ASCII Data String Conversion) Name Description When the number of the conversion data specified by N is 0 When the converted result exceeds the size of the area for storing ASCII codes specified by N When the converted result exceeds the area When the area is exceeded in index modification...

  • Page 681: F251 Atob (Multiple Ascii Data Strings To Binary Data Conversion)

    25.3 F251 ATOB (Multiple ASCII Data Strings to Binary Data Conversion) 25.3 F251 ATOB (Multiple ASCII Data Strings to Binary Data Conversion) Converts ASCII code character strings to 16-bit/32-bit binary data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Control character string Starting number of the area storing the ASCII code Conversion method Starting number of the area for storing the binary data of the converted result...
  • Page 682 25.3 F251 ATOB (Multiple ASCII Data Strings to Binary Data Conversion) Range of data that can be handled "H+32" Convert hexadecimal ASCII data to 32-bit data 0 to FFFFFFFF (forward direction) "H-16" Convert hexadecimal ASCII data to 16-bit data 0 to FFFF (reverse direction) "H-32"...
  • Page 683 25.3 F251 ATOB (Multiple ASCII Data Strings to Binary Data Conversion) ■ Conversion example ● Example of converting to four sets of three decimal digits (when there is no comma",") Converts to 16-bit data “123456789012” → DT100 = K 123 DT101 = K 456 DT102 = K 789 DT103 = K 12...
  • Page 684 25.3 F251 ATOB (Multiple ASCII Data Strings to Binary Data Conversion) ● Example of converting to three sets of four hexadecimal digits Converts to 16-bit data in the forward direction “001209AB000E” → DT100 = K 1200 DT101 = K AB09 DT102 = K 0E00 •...
  • Page 685 25.3 F251 ATOB (Multiple ASCII Data Strings to Binary Data Conversion) (Note 1) Specify the maximum number of digits. ● Example of converting to two sets of five decimal digits with decimal points (when there is no comma",") “1234.50006.7” 　→ DT100 = K 12345 DT101 = K 67 •...
  • Page 686 25.3 F251 ATOB (Multiple ASCII Data Strings to Binary Data Conversion) • When the number of numeric data items is"2", starting position for reading is"0", number of digits is"6", when converting to 16-bit data (Note 1) A decimal point is also counted as a digit ■...
  • Page 687 25.3 F251 ATOB (Multiple ASCII Data Strings to Binary Data Conversion) Name Description (Rated value for 32-bit data: 8) The ASCII code specified by S2 contains any code other than 0 to F, a sign, a space, a dot, or a comma The number of converted blocks specified by n is 0 The size of the area for storing ASCII codes specified by n is 0 The ASCII code to be converted exceeds the area...

  • Page 688: F252 Achk (Multiple Ascii Data Strings Ascii Code Check)

    25.4 F252 ACHK (Multiple ASCII Data Strings ASCII Code Check) 25.4 F252 ACHK (Multiple ASCII Data Strings ASCII Code Check) Checks whether the specified ASCII data is correct. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the control character string, or character string data Starting number of the area storing the ASCII code Area storing the conversion method, or constant data ■...
  • Page 689 25.4 F252 ACHK (Multiple ASCII Data Strings ASCII Code Check) ■ Flag operations Name Description When there is an error in the control string specified by S1 When the conversion format specified by S1 is in decimal, and the direction of converted data is changed to the normal direction When the conversion format specified by S1 is hexadecimal, and the size of the area for storing ASCII codes specified by n exceeds the rated value...

  • Page 690: F253 Sset (Character Constant → Ascii Code Conversion: With Storage Area Size)

    25.5 F253 SSET (Character Constant → ASCII Code Conversion: with Storage Area Size) 25.5 F253 SSET (Character Constant → ASCII Code Conversion: with Storage Area Size) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Storage area size (permissible range: K1 to K32767, H8000) Character constant to be converted (permissible range: 0 to 256 characters) Starting device address of the destination ■...
  • Page 691 25.5 F253 SSET (Character Constant → ASCII Code Conversion: with Storage Area Size) ■ Processing Example 1) When a string "ABC1230 DEF" (11 characters including a space) is to be converted S1...K12 S2... "ABC1230 DEF" D...DT0 (Note 1) Data outside the range in the destination (*) (bytes higher than DT7) does not change. Storage area size Number of characters Example 2) With the 16 characters from A to P as one set, when 16 sets (256...
  • Page 692 25.5 F253 SSET (Character Constant → ASCII Code Conversion: with Storage Area Size) Storage area size Number of characters Example 4) When a string “ABC1230 DEF” (11 characters including a space) is to be converted S1...H8000　S2... “ABC1230 DEF”　D...DT0 (Note 1) Data outside the range in the destination (*) (bytes higher than DT6) does not change.
  • Page 693 25.5 F253 SSET (Character Constant → ASCII Code Conversion: with Storage Area Size) ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 Turns ON when the accessible range is exceeded if the storage area size starting with D is secured.

  • Page 694: F254 Print (Create Text)

    25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) Specifies the create text form and the data to be output in text format and creates text in ASCII code. The F254 PRINT instruction can be used with the unit firmware Ver. 1.7 or later. ■...
  • Page 695 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) ● When not specifying the storage area size, specify H8000. ■ Operand S2 setting ● Specify the address of the device storing the create text form or a character constant (maximum 256 characters). ● The create text form consists of a body text, conversion form (%d, %e, etc.), line break code (\n), and tab code (\t).
  • Page 696 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) SSET H8000 "AB12" DT110 S1 = H8000 S2 = "%d %u %x %b %f %e %g %s" S3 = DT100 Transfer result: -1 32767 FFFF 1000 123.4567 1.234567e+02 123.457 AB12 DT100 Data for %d DT101 K32767 Data for %u DT102...
  • Page 697 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) ■ Setting examples Example 1: When creating the following text ・Text image Floor A humidity: 25 %. Floor B humidity: 28 %. ・Set value S1=K50 S2="Floor A humidity: %d %%.¥nFloor B humidity: %d %%." S3=DT100 D=DT200 DT100 K 25...
  • Page 698 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) Example 2: When creating the following text ・Text image Production volume: 5 ・Set value S1=H8000 S2="Production volume: %d" S3=DT1 D=DT50 DT150 20 (Number of characters) DT151 H72(r) H50(P) DT152 H64(d) H6F(o) H63(c) H75(u) DT153 H79(i) H84(t) DT154 H6E(n)
  • Page 699 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) Example 4: When creating the following text ・Text image Location: Nagoya, Aichi ・Set value S1=H8000 S2="Location: %s, %s" S3=DT1 D=DT50 DT50 23 (Number of characters) H61(a) H4E(N) DT51 H6F(o) H4C(L) H6F(o) H67(g) DT52 H61(a) H63(c) H61(a) H79(y) H69(i)
  • Page 700 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) Example 5: When the specified number of characters is larger than the number of characters ・Text image Location: [ ˽ ˽ Nagoya], [Aichi˽ ˽ ˽ ] (Note 1) (Note 2) Right align Left align ・Set value S1=K30 S2="Location: %-8s, %8s"...
  • Page 701 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) Example 6: When the created text exceeds the storage area size specified in D and CY is set ・Text image Nagoya humidity : 25 % (Note 1) ・Set value S1=K20 S2="%s humidity : %d %%" S3=DT1 D=DT50 DT50...

  • Page 702: F254 Print Instruction Conversion Form Table

    25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. Turns ON when the accessible range is exceeded if the storage area size starting with D is secured. Turns ON when a value outside the settable range is specified for S1. R9007 Turns ON when conversion data that is not real number is specified for the conversion form R9008...
  • Page 703 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) ■ Conversion form table Conversio Before conversion After conversion Usage example n form Binary data ASCII data "%d" or 16-bit data (signed integer) Decimal ASCII data "%d" , "%5d" , "%+5d" , "%i" "%-5d" , "%05d" , "%10.5d" , "% d"...
  • Page 704 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) Items Conve Before After Description rsion conversion conversion form Binary data ASCII data When specifying the number of display digits with [f , e , E ], be sure to specify the number of characters below the decimal point. Specification of K100 "100"...
  • Page 705 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) Items Conve Before After Description rsion conversion conversion form Binary data ASCII data Even if space (␣) is added when specifying %␣8.3f SF-123.4567 "-123.457" %u, %x, %b or %s, it will not be reflected in %␣10.3 SF1234.567 "␣1.235e+03"...
  • Page 706 25.6 F254 PRINT (Create Text) Conversi Before conversion After conversion Remarks on form Binary data ASCII data Example 1: %␣+d K100 → Output data is "100” with no space or sign. Example 2: %+␣d K100 → Output data is "+100” with (+) sign.

  • Page 707: Overview Of String Instructions F257 Scmp To F265 Srep

    25.7 Overview of String Instructions F257 SCMP to F265 SREP 25.7 Overview of String Instructions F257 SCMP to F265 SREP ■ Data table structure The character string data table sets the character string size, number of characters, and character data. String size Maximum number of characters that can be stored S+1:...

  • Page 708: F257 Scmp (Comparing Character Strings)

    25.8 F257 SCMP (Comparing Character Strings) 25.8 F257 SCMP (Comparing Character Strings) Compares two specified character strings, and outputs the judgment result to a special internal relay. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Character string 1 for comparison Character string 2 for comparison ■...
  • Page 709 25.8 F257 SCMP (Comparing Character Strings) 10 (string size) DT10 8 (string size) 4 (character count) DT11 5 (character count) "B" "A" "B" "A" DT12 (Byte 1) (Byte 0) (Byte 1) (Byte 0) "0" "C" "0" "C" DT13 (Byte 3) (Byte 2) (Byte 3) (Byte 2)

  • Page 710: F258 Sadd (Character String Addition)

    25.9 F258 SADD (Character String Addition) 25.9 F258 SADD (Character String Addition) Concatenates one character string with another. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Character string to be concatenated Character string to be concatenated Area in which the concatenated character strings are stored ■...
  • Page 711 25.9 F258 SADD (Character String Addition) ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program DT10 DT11 "B" "A" DT12 "2" "1" "D" "C" DT13 "3" "E" DT14 DT15 DT16 DT20 Specify via the user program DT21 DT22 "B" "A" DT23 "D"...

  • Page 712: F259 Len (Character String Length)

    25.10 F259 LEN (Character String Length) 25.10 F259 LEN (Character String Length) Determines the number of characters stored in a character string. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Character string Area that stores the number of characters in the calculation result ■...
  • Page 713 25.10 F259 LEN (Character String Length) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9008 Turns ON when number of characters is greater than the character string size (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 25-43...

  • Page 714: F260 Ssrc (Search For Character String)

    25.11 F260 SSRC (Search for Character String) 25.11 F260 SSRC (Search for Character String) Searches for the specified character string. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the character data to be searched (character string or character constant) Character string to be searched Area storing the search result ■...
  • Page 715 25.11 F260 SSRC (Search for Character String) Characters to search for Character table to be searched 10 (string size) 10 (string size) DT10 3 (character count) DT11 8 (character count) Search "F" "E" "B" "A" DT12 (Byte 1) (Byte 0) (Byte 1) (Byte 0) "G"...

  • Page 716: F261 Right (Right Retrieve From Character String)

    25.12 F261 RIGHT (Right Retrieve from Character String) 25.12 F261 RIGHT (Right Retrieve from Character String) Retrieves a character string with the specified number of characters from the right side of a character string. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Character string Area storing the number of characters, or constant data...
  • Page 717 25.12 F261 RIGHT (Right Retrieve from Character String) (*1): Specify via the user program (*2): Area storing the operation results ■ Precautions for programming ● The character data of [D] prior to the operation is cleared. ● If the number of characters in [S2] is greater than the number of characters in the [S1] character string, the number of characters of the [S1] character string is sent.

  • Page 718: F262 Left (Left Retrieve From Character String)

    25.13 F262 LEFT (Left Retrieve from Character String) 25.13 F262 LEFT (Left Retrieve from Character String) Retrieves the specified number of characters from the left side of a character string. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Character string Area storing the number of characters, or constant data Area storing the character string ■...
  • Page 719 25.13 F262 LEFT (Left Retrieve from Character String) (*1): Specify via the user program (*2): Area storing the operation results ■ Precautions for programming ● The character data of [D] prior to the operation is cleared. ● If the number of characters specified by [S2] is greater than the number of characters in the character string specified by [S1], then the number of characters in the character string specified by [S1] are transferred.

  • Page 720: F263 Midr (Read From Any Position In Character String)

    25.14 F263 MIDR (Read from Any Position in Character String) 25.14 F263 MIDR (Read from Any Position in Character String) Retrieves a character string of the specified number of characters from the specified position in a character string. ■ Instruction format ■...
  • Page 721 25.14 F263 MIDR (Read from Any Position in Character String) (*1): Specify via the user program (*2): Area storing the operation results ■ Precautions for programming ● The character data of [D] prior to the operation is cleared. ● If the number of characters specified by [S3] is greater than the number of characters in the character string specified by [S1] from the position specified by [S2], then the number of characters in the character string specified by [S1] are transferred.

  • Page 722: F264 Midw (Write To Any Position In Character String)

    25.15 F264 MIDW (Write to Any Position in Character String) 25.15 F264 MIDW (Write to Any Position in Character String) These instructions write a specified number of characters from a character string to a specified position in the character string. ■...
  • Page 723 25.15 F264 MIDW (Write to Any Position in Character String) "B" "A" "D" "C" "F" "E" (*1) DT20 "H" "G" DT21 "A" "1" DT22 (Byte 1) (Byte 0) "C" "B" DT23 DT20 (Byte 3) (Byte 2) (*2) "6" "5" DT24 DT21 (Byte 5) (Byte 4)

  • Page 724: F265 Srep (Replace Character Strings)

    25.16 F265 SREP (Replace Character Strings) 25.16 F265 SREP (Replace Character Strings) Replaces the specified number of characters in a character string with the same number of different characters, starting from the specified position. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Replacement character string Starting address of the area storing a character string...
  • Page 725 25.16 F265 SREP (Replace Character Strings) "B" "A" "D" "C" "E" (*1) DT20 DT21 "A" "1" DT22 (Byte 1) (Byte 0) "C" "B" DT23 DT20 (Byte 3) (Byte 2) (*2) "E" "D" DT24 DT21 (Byte 5) (Byte 4) "6" "5" DT25 "2"...
  • Page 726 (MEMO) 25-56 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 727: Data Manipulation Instructions

    26 Data Manipulation Instructions 26.1 F270 MAX (Search Maximum Value from 16-bit Data Block) ...26-2 26.2 F271 DMAX (Search Maximum Value from 32-bit Data Block) ..26-4 26.3 F272 MIN (Search Minimum Value from 16-bit Data Block) .....26-6 26.4 F273 DMIN (Search Minimum Value from 32-bit Data Block)...26-8 26.5 F275 MEAN (16-bit Data Sum and Average)........26-10 26.6 F276 DMEAN (32-bit Data Sum and Average) .........26-12 26.7 F277 SORT (16-bit Data Block Sort) ..........26-14...

  • Page 728: F270 Max (Search Maximum Value From 16-Bit Data Block)

    26.1 F270 MAX (Search Maximum Value from 16-bit Data Block) 26.1 F270 MAX (Search Maximum Value from 16-bit Data Block) Finds the maximum value in the specified memory area range (word data table). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting area that stores word data Ending area that stores word data Area storing the operation results (two words)
  • Page 729 26.1 F270 MAX (Search Maximum Value from 16-bit Data Block) ● If there is multiple data with the same value as the maximum value, the relative address of the first value found searching from [S1] is stored in [D+1]. ■ Precautions for programming [D+1] will stored even if it overflows the specified device area, so it may corrupt the start of other device areas.

  • Page 730: F271 Dmax (Search Maximum Value From 32-Bit Data Block)

    26.2 F271 DMAX (Search Maximum Value from 32-bit Data Block) 26.2 F271 DMAX (Search Maximum Value from 32-bit Data Block) Calculates the maximum value of the specified memory area range (double word data table). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting area storing double word data Ending area storing double word data...
  • Page 731 26.2 F271 DMAX (Search Maximum Value from 32-bit Data Block) Double word data table Lower word Lower word Maximum value Higher word Higher word S1+1: D+1: S1+2: D+2: Relative address S1+3: S2-1: Lower word Relative address Higher word ● If there is multiple data with the same value as the maximum value, the relative address of the first value found searching from [S1] is stored in [D+2].

  • Page 732: F272 Min (Search Minimum Value From 16-Bit Data Block)

    26.3 F272 MIN (Search Minimum Value from 16-bit Data Block) 26.3 F272 MIN (Search Minimum Value from 16-bit Data Block) Finds the minimum value in the specified memory area range (word data table). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting area that stores word data Ending area that stores word data Area storing the operation results (two words)
  • Page 733 26.3 F272 MIN (Search Minimum Value from 16-bit Data Block) Word data table Maximum value Relative address S1+1: D+1: Relative address ● When there is multiple data sharing the same minimum value, the relative address of the first result found searching from [S1] is stored in [D+1]. ■...

  • Page 734: F273 Dmin (Search Minimum Value From 32-Bit Data Block)

    26.4 F273 DMIN (Search Minimum Value from 32-bit Data Block) 26.4 F273 DMIN (Search Minimum Value from 32-bit Data Block) Finds the minimum value of the specified memory area range (double word data table). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting area storing double word data Ending area storing double word data...
  • Page 735 26.4 F273 DMIN (Search Minimum Value from 32-bit Data Block) Double word data table Lower word Lower word Minimum value Higher word Higher word S1+1: D+1: S1+2: D+2: Relative address S1+3: S2-1: Lower word Relative address Higher word ● When there is multiple data sharing the same minimum value, the relative address of the first result found searching from [S1] is stored in [D+2].

  • Page 736: F275 Mean (16-Bit Data Sum And Average)

    26.5 F275 MEAN (16-bit Data Sum and Average) 26.5 F275 MEAN (16-bit Data Sum and Average) Calculates the total value and mean value of the specified memory area range (word data). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting area that stores word data Ending area that stores word data Area storing the result of the operation (three words) ■...
  • Page 737 26.5 F275 MEAN (16-bit Data Sum and Average) Name Description R9008 ON when [S1] is greater than [S2] (ER) Turns ON when S1 and S2 are different devices R9009 Turns ON when overflow/underflow occurs during calculation (CY) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 26-11...

  • Page 738: F276 Dmean (32-Bit Data Sum And Average)

    26.6 F276 DMEAN (32-bit Data Sum and Average) 26.6 F276 DMEAN (32-bit Data Sum and Average) Calculates the total and mean values of the specified memory area range (double word data). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting area storing double word data Ending area storing double word data Area storing the operation results (6 words) ■...
  • Page 739 26.6 F276 DMEAN (32-bit Data Sum and Average) Double word data table Lower word Higher word S1+1: S1+2: S1+3: Target area S2-1: Lower word Higher word ● For the mean value, the decimal is rounded down to make an integer. ■...

  • Page 740: F277 Sort (16-Bit Data Block Sort)

    26.7 F277 SORT (16-bit Data Block Sort) 26.7 F277 SORT (16-bit Data Block Sort) Sorts the strings (word data) in the specified memory area range into ascending or descending order. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting area storing sort data Ending area storing sort data Area storing sort conditions, or constant data ■...
  • Page 741 26.7 F277 SORT (16-bit Data Block Sort) ● Descending order If data is stored in DT10 to DT19 as shown below and [S3] = K1, the following operation is performed. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 ON when [S1] is greater than [S2]...

  • Page 742: F278 Dsort (32-Bit Data Block Sort)

    26.8 F278 DSORT (32-bit Data Block Sort) 26.8 F278 DSORT (32-bit Data Block Sort) Sorts strings (double word data) in the specified memory area in ascending or descending order. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting area storing sort data Ending area storing sort data Area storing sort conditions, or constant data ■...
  • Page 743 26.8 F278 DSORT (32-bit Data Block Sort) Double word data table Lower word Higher word S1+1: S1+2: S1+3: Target area S2-1: Lower word Higher word ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program ● Ascending order If data is stored in DT10 to DT19 as below and [S3] = K0, the following operation will be performed.

  • Page 744: F282 Scal (16-Bit Data Linearization)

    26.9 F282 SCAL (16-bit Data Linearization) 26.9 F282 SCAL (16-bit Data Linearization) Performs scaling of the given data table and finds output value Y with regards to input value X. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Source 16-bit data equivalent to input value X, or the area where it is stored Starting address of the data table used for scaling (linearization) Area where output result Y is stored ■...

  • Page 745: Operation Example

    26.9 F282 SCAL (16-bit Data Linearization) Structure of the data table used in scaling (linearization) (if S2 = DT10 and n = K10) (Xn-1,yn-1) (X4,y4) (Xn,yn) Y="D" (X3,y3) (X2,y2) (X1,y1) X="S1" Input value ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program The data table is referenced starting from DT10, output value Y for the input value stored in DT0 is calculated, and the result is stored in DT120.
  • Page 746 26.9 F282 SCAL (16-bit Data Linearization) Name Description Turns ON when n < 2 or n > 99 in [S2] R9008 Turns ON when data table in [S2] exceeds area (ER) Turns ON when Xn is not in ascending order 26-20 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 747: F283 Dscal (32-Bit Data Linearization)

    26.10 F283 DSCAL (32-bit Data Linearization) 26.10 F283 DSCAL (32-bit Data Linearization) Performs scaling of the given data table and finds output value Y with regards to input value X. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Original 32-bit data corresponding to input value X, or storage area Starting address of the data table used for scaling (linearization) Area where output result Y is stored ■...
  • Page 748 26.10 F283 DSCAL (32-bit Data Linearization) Structure of the data table used in scaling (linearization) (if S2 = DT10 and n = K10) (Xn-1,yn-1) (X4,y4) (Xn,yn) Y="D" (X3,y3) (X2,y2) (X1,y1) X="S1" Input value ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program Finds output value Y with regards to input value X stored in DT0, with reference to the data table starting from DT10, and stores the result in DT120 to DT121.
  • Page 749 26.10 F283 DSCAL (32-bit Data Linearization) ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 Turns ON when n<2 or n>99 in [S2] R9008 Turns ON when data table in [S2] exceeds area (ER) Turns ON when Xn is not in ascending order WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 750: F284 Ramp (16-Bit Data Ramp Output)

    26.11 F284 RAMP (16-bit Data Ramp Output) 26.11 F284 RAMP (16-bit Data Ramp Output) Linear output is executed based on the elapsed time from the start of execution, by performing scaling from the output default value, target value, and time width. ■...
  • Page 751 26.11 F284 RAMP (16-bit Data Ramp Output) R0 (execution condition) DT10 (output value) 1000 (initial value) 400 ms (time interval) 1100 DT0 (default value) = K5000 DT1 (target value) = K1000 DT2 (time width) = K400 R0 (execution condition) DT10 (output value) 5000 (default value) 1000 (target value) 400 ms (time interval)

  • Page 752: F285 Limt (16-Bit Data Upper And Lower Limit Control)

    26.12 F285 LIMT (16-bit Data Upper and Lower Limit Control) 26.12 F285 LIMT (16-bit Data Upper and Lower Limit Control) Performs upper and lower limit control (word data). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the lower limit or lower limit data Area storing the upper limit or upper limit data Area storing the input value or input value data Area storing the output value...
  • Page 753 26.12 F285 LIMT (16-bit Data Upper and Lower Limit Control) Output value [D] [S2] Lower limit value [S1] Input value [S3] Upper limit value [S2] [S1] ● For control using only the upper limit value Specify K-32768 (or H8000) for the lower limit value [S1]. ●...

  • Page 754: F286 Dlimt (32-Bit Data Upper And Lower Limit Control)

    26.13 F286 DLIMT (32-bit Data Upper and Lower Limit Control) 26.13 F286 DLIMT (32-bit Data Upper and Lower Limit Control) Performs upper and lower limit control (double word). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the lower limit, or lower limit data (two words) Area storing the upper limit, or upper limit data (two words) Area storing the input value, or input value data (two words) Area storing the output value (two words)
  • Page 755 26.13 F286 DLIMT (32-bit Data Upper and Lower Limit Control) Output value [D, D+1] [S2, S2+1] Input value Upper limit value [S3, S3+1] [S2, S2+1] [S1, S1+1] ● For control using only the upper limit value Set K-2147483648 (or H80000000) for lower limit [S1, S1+1]. ●...

  • Page 756: F287 Band (16-Bit Data Deadband Control)

    26.14 F287 BAND (16-bit Data Deadband Control) 26.14 F287 BAND (16-bit Data Deadband Control) Performs deadband control (word). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the lower limit or lower limit data Area storing the upper limit or upper limit data Area storing the input value or input value data Area storing the output value ■...
  • Page 757 26.14 F287 BAND (16-bit Data Deadband Control) Output value [D] [S2] Deadband lower limit [S1] Input value [S3] Deadband upper limit [S2] During this time, 0 is output. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When K-100 is stored in DT10 and K100 in DT20, the following operation will be performed. Value of DT30 Value stored in DT40 K-300...

  • Page 758: F288 Dband (32-Bit Data Deadband Control)

    26.15 F288 DBAND (32-bit Data Deadband Control) 26.15 F288 DBAND (32-bit Data Deadband Control) Carries out deadband control (double word). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the lower limit, or lower limit data (two words) Area storing the upper limit, or upper limit data (two words) Area storing the input value, or input value data (two words) Area storing the output value (two words) ■...
  • Page 759 26.15 F288 DBAND (32-bit Data Deadband Control) Output value [D, D+1] Deadband lower limit [S1, S1+1] Input value [S3, S3+1] Deadband upper limit [S2, S2+1] During this time, 0 is output. ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program If K-10000 is stored in DT10 and DT11, and K10000 is stored in DT20 and DT21, the following operation is performed.

  • Page 760: F289 Zone (16-Bit Data Zone Control)

    26.16 F289 ZONE (16-bit Data Zone Control) 26.16 F289 ZONE (16-bit Data Zone Control) Performs zone control (word). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area where negative bias value is stored, or negative bias value data Area where positive bias value is stored, or positive bias value data Area storing the input value or input value data Area storing the output value ■...
  • Page 761 26.16 F289 ZONE (16-bit Data Zone Control) Output value [D] [S2] Input value [S3] Bias value for negative case [S1] ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program When K-100 is stored in DT10, and K100 is stored in DT20 Value of DT30 Value stored in DT40 K-300...

  • Page 762: F290 Dzone (32-Bit Data Zone Control)

    26.17 F290 DZONE (32-bit Data Zone Control) 26.17 F290 DZONE (32-bit Data Zone Control) Carries out zone control (double word). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing negative bias values, or negative bias value data (two words) Area storing positive bias values, or positive bias value data (two words) Area storing the input value, or input value data (two words) Area storing the output value (two words) ■...
  • Page 763 26.17 F290 DZONE (32-bit Data Zone Control) Output value [D, D+1] [S2, S2+1] Input value [S3, S3+1] Bias value for negative case [S1, S1+1] ■ Operation example Operation of instruction format description program If K-10000 is stored in DT10 and DT11, and K10000 is stored in DT20 and DT21, the following operation is performed.
  • Page 764 (MEMO) 26-38 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 765: Floating-Point Instruction

    27 Floating-point Instruction 27.1 F309 FMV (Floating Point Data Move) ..........27-3 27.2 F310 F+ (Floating Point Data Addition) ..........27-5 27.3 F311 F- (Floating Point Data Subtraction) ........27-7 27.4 F312 F* (Floating Point Data Multiplication) ........27-9 27.5 F313 F% (Floating Point Data Division)..........27-11 27.6 F314 SIN (Floating Point Data Sine Operation)........27-13 27.7 F315 COS (Floating Point Data Cosine Operation) ......27-15 27.8 F316 TAN (Floating Point Data Tangent Operation) ......27-17...
  • Page 766 27 Floating-point Instruction 27.27 F335 F+/- (Floating Point Data Sign Conversion)......27-54 27.28 F336 FABS (Floating Point Data Absolute Value Conversion) ..27-56 27.29 F337 RAD (Degree to Radian Conversion) ........27-58 27.30 F338 DEG (Radian to Degree Conversion) ........27-60 27-2 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 767: F309 Fmv (Floating Point Data Move)

    27.1 F309 FMV (Floating Point Data Move) 27.1 F309 FMV (Floating Point Data Move) Transfers the specified real number data to the specified area. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Transfer data: Area storing real number data (32-bit), or constant data Destination: Data transfer destination area ■...
  • Page 768 27.1 F309 FMV (Floating Point Data Move) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 R9008 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. (ER) 27-4 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 769: Instruction Format

    27.2 F310 F+ (Floating Point Data Addition) 27.2 F310 F+ (Floating Point Data Addition) Adds real number data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing augend data, or augend data (two words) Area storing addend data, or addend data (two words) Area storing the addition result (two words) ■...
  • Page 770 27.2 F310 F+ (Floating Point Data Addition) ● If a K constant is specified for [S1] or [S2], the same process is performed as if an integer device was specified. ■ Program example ● When R0 is turned ON, f 4.554 is stored in DT30 and DT31. ●...

  • Page 771: F311 F- (Floating Point Data Subtraction)

    27.3 F311 F- (Floating Point Data Subtraction) 27.3 F311 F- (Floating Point Data Subtraction) Subtracts real number data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the minuend data, or the minuend data (two words) Area storing the subtrahend data, or the subtrahend data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 772 27.3 F311 F- (Floating Point Data Subtraction) ● If a K constant is specified for [S1] or [S2], the same process is performed as if an integer device was specified. ■ Program example ● When R0 turns ON, f 0.445 is stored in DT30 and DT31. ●...

  • Page 773: F312 F* (Floating Point Data Multiplication)

    27.4 F312 F* (Floating Point Data Multiplication) 27.4 F312 F* (Floating Point Data Multiplication) Multiplies real number data items. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the multiplicand data, or the multiplicand data (two words) Area storing the multiplier data, or the multiplier data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 774 27.4 F312 F* (Floating Point Data Multiplication) ● If a K constant is specified for [S1] or [S2], the same process is performed as if an integer device was specified. ■ Program example The f123.4000 is stored to DT30 and DT31 when the R0 turns ON. ■...

  • Page 775: F313 F% (Floating Point Data Division)

    27.5 F313 F% (Floating Point Data Division) 27.5 F313 F% (Floating Point Data Division) Divides real number data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the dividend data, or dividend data (two words) Area storing the divisor data, or divisor data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 776 27.5 F313 F% (Floating Point Data Division) ● If a K constant is specified for [S1] or [S2], the same process is performed as if an integer device was specified. ■ Program example When R0 turns ON, f5.432100 is stored to DT30 to DT31. ■...

  • Page 777: F314 Sin (Floating Point Data Sine Operation)

    27.6 F314 SIN (Floating Point Data Sine Operation) 27.6 F314 SIN (Floating Point Data Sine Operation) Calculates the trigonometric function sin(). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle data, or angle data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 778 27.6 F314 SIN (Floating Point Data Sine Operation) ■ Precautions for programming The accuracy decreases as the absolute value of the input value increases. Where possible, use angle data within the range -2π radians ≤ input ≤ 2π radians. ■ Program example When R0 turns ON, f0.4999999 is stored in DT20 and DT21.

  • Page 779: F315 Cos (Floating Point Data Cosine Operation)

    27.7 F315 COS (Floating Point Data Cosine Operation) 27.7 F315 COS (Floating Point Data Cosine Operation) Operates the trigonometric function cos(). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle data, or angle data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 780 27.7 F315 COS (Floating Point Data Cosine Operation) ■ Precautions for programming The accuracy decreases as the absolute value of the input value increases. Where possible, use angle data within the range -2π radians ≤ input ≤ 2π radians. ■ Program example When R0 is ON, f 0.7071068 is stored in DT20 to DT21.

  • Page 781: F316 Tan (Floating Point Data Tangent Operation)

    27.8 F316 TAN (Floating Point Data Tangent Operation) 27.8 F316 TAN (Floating Point Data Tangent Operation) Calculates the trigonometrical function tan(). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle data, or angle data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 782 27.8 F316 TAN (Floating Point Data Tangent Operation) ■ Precautions for programming The accuracy decreases as the absolute value of the input value increases. Where possible, use angle data within the range -2π radians ≤ input ≤ 2π radians. ■ Program example f 1.732048 is stored in DT20 and DT21 when R0 turns ON.

  • Page 783: F317 Asin (Floating Point Data Arcsine Operation)

    27.9 F317 ASIN (Floating Point Data Arcsine Operation) 27.9 F317 ASIN (Floating Point Data Arcsine Operation) −1 Calculates the trigonometric function SIN ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle data, or angle data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 784 27.9 F317 ASIN (Floating Point Data Arcsine Operation) ■ Precautions for programming [D, D+1] is stored in the following range: -π/2 ≤ [D, D+1] ≤ π/2 [radians]　　　　　　　　 [radians] ■ Program example f0.5235986 (30° radians) is stored in DT20 to DT21 when R0 turns ON. ■...

  • Page 785: F318 Acos (Floating Point Data Arccosine Operation)

    27.10 F318 ACOS (Floating Point Data Arccosine Operation) 27.10 F318 ACOS (Floating Point Data Arccosine Operation) −1 Calculates the trigonometric function COS ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle data, or angle data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 786 27.10 F318 ACOS (Floating Point Data Arccosine Operation) ■ Precautions for programming [D, D+1] is stored in the following range: 0.0 ≤ [D, D+1] ≤ π [radians]　　　　　 [radians] ■ Program example When R0 turns ON, f0.7853980 (45° in radians) is stored in DT20 and DT21. ■...

  • Page 787: F319 Atan (Floating Point Data Arctangent Operation)

    27.11 F319 ATAN (Floating Point Data Arctangent Operation) 27.11 F319 ATAN (Floating Point Data Arctangent Operation) −1 Calculates the trigonometrical function TAN ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle data, or angle data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 788 27.11 F319 ATAN (Floating Point Data Arctangent Operation) ■ Precautions for programming [D, D+1] is stored in the following range: -π/2 < [D, D+1] < π/2 [radians]　　　　　　　　 [radians] ■ Program example f1.047197 (60° in radians) is stored in DT20 to DT21 when R0 turns ON. ■...

  • Page 789: F320 Ln (Floating Point Data Natural Logarithmic Operation)

    27.12 F320 LN (Floating Point Data Natural Logarithmic Operation) 27.12 F320 LN (Floating Point Data Natural Logarithmic Operation) Calculates the natural logarithm LN(). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle data, or angle data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 790 27.12 F320 LN (Floating Point Data Natural Logarithmic Operation) ■ Program example ● When R0 turns ON, f1.6094379 is stored in DT20 and DT21. ● When R0 turns ON, f-0.3160815 is stored in DT30 and DT31. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification.

  • Page 791: F321 Exp (Floating Point Data Exponent Operation)

    27.13 F321 EXP (Floating Point Data Exponent Operation) 27.13 F321 EXP (Floating Point Data Exponent Operation) Calculates the exponent EXP(). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle data, or angle data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 792 27.13 F321 EXP (Floating Point Data Exponent Operation) ■ Program example ● When R0 turns ON, f7.389056 is stored in DT20 and DT21. ● When R0 turns ON, f221.406402 is stored in DT30 and DT31. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification.

  • Page 793: F322 Log (Floating Point Data Logarithm Operation)

    27.14 F322 LOG (Floating Point Data Logarithm Operation) 27.14 F322 LOG (Floating Point Data Logarithm Operation) Calculates the logarithm LOG(). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle data, or angle data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 794 27.14 F322 LOG (Floating Point Data Logarithm Operation) ■ Program example ● f 1.30103 is stored in DT20 and DT21 when R0 turns ON. ● f 0.0108932 is stored in DT30 and DT31 when R0 turns ON. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification.

  • Page 795: F323 Pwr (Floating Point Data Power Operation)

    27.15 F323 PWR (Floating Point Data Power Operation) 27.15 F323 PWR (Floating Point Data Power Operation) Calculates powers for real number data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the base data, or base data (two words) Area storing the power data, or power data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 796 27.15 F323 PWR (Floating Point Data Power Operation) ● If a K constant is specified for [S1] or [S2], the same process is performed as if an integer device was specified. ■ Program example ● When R0 turns ON, f 625.0 is stored to DT20 to DT21. ●...

  • Page 797: F324 Fsqr (Floating Point Data Square Root Operation)

    27.16 F324 FSQR (Floating Point Data Square Root Operation) 27.16 F324 FSQR (Floating Point Data Square Root Operation) Calculates the square root of real number data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing operation data, or operation data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 798 27.16 F324 FSQR (Floating Point Data Square Root Operation) ■ Program example When R0 turns ON, f1.41421 is stored in DT20 and DT21. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1] R9008 Turns ON when [S, S+1] is not 0 ≤...

  • Page 799: F325 Flt (16-Bit Integer To Floating Point Data Conversion)

    27.17 F325 FLT (16-bit Integer to Floating Point Data Conversion) 27.17 F325 FLT (16-bit Integer to Floating Point Data Conversion) Converts 16-bit integer data to real number data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing operation data, or operation data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...

  • Page 800: F326 Dflt (32-Bit Integer To Floating Point Data Conversion)

    27.18 F326 DFLT (32-bit Integer to Floating Point Data Conversion) 27.18 F326 DFLT (32-bit Integer to Floating Point Data Conversion) Converts 32-bit integers to real number data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing operation data, or operation data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 801 27.18 F326 DFLT (32-bit Integer to Floating Point Data Conversion) Name Description R9009 Turns ON when the significant digits of the mantissa for the operation result real number data cannot be obtained (CY) R900B Turns ON when the calculation result is"0" WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 27-37...

  • Page 802: F327 Int [Floating Point Data To 16-Bit Integer Conversion (Largest Integer Not Exceeding The Floating-Point Data)]

    27.19 F327 INT [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Largest Integer Not Exceeding the Floating-point Data)] 27.19 F327 INT [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Largest Integer Not Exceeding the Floating-point Data)] Converts real number data to 16-bit integers (largest integer not exceeding floating point real number).
  • Page 803 27.19 F327 INT [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Largest Integer Not Exceeding the Floating-point Data)] ● If the real number -1.234 is stored in DT10 and DT11, the following operation is performed. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1]...

  • Page 804: F328 Dint [Floating Point Data To 32-Bit Integer Conversion (Largest Integer Not Exceeding The Floating-Point Data)]

    27.20 F328 DINT [Floating Point Data to 32-bit Integer Conversion (Largest Integer Not Exceeding the Floating-point Data)] 27.20 F328 DINT [Floating Point Data to 32-bit Integer Conversion (Largest Integer Not Exceeding the Floating-point Data)] Converts real number data to 32-bit integers (largest integer not exceeding floating point real number).
  • Page 805 27.20 F328 DINT [Floating Point Data to 32-bit Integer Conversion (Largest Integer Not Exceeding the Floating-point Data)] ● If the real number -12345.67 is stored in DT10 and DT11, the following operation is performed. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1]...

  • Page 806: F329 Fix [Floating Point Data To 16-Bit Integer Conversion (Round-Down)]

    27.21 F329 FIX [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round- down)] 27.21 F329 FIX [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round-down)] Converts real number data to a 16-bit integer (rounded down to the nearest integer). ■ Instruction format ■...
  • Page 807 27.21 F329 FIX [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round- down)] ● When the real number -1.234567 is stored in DT10 and DT11, the following operation is performed. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1]...

  • Page 808: F330 Dfix [Floating Point Data To 32-Bit Integer Conversion (Round-Down)]

    27.22 F330 DFIX [Floating Point Data to 32-bit Integer Conversion (Round- down)] 27.22 F330 DFIX [Floating Point Data to 32-bit Integer Conversion (Round-down)] Converts real number data to 32-bit integers (rounding down the decimal point). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing operation data, or operation data (two words)
  • Page 809 27.22 F330 DFIX [Floating Point Data to 32-bit Integer Conversion (Round- down)] ● If the real number -123456.7 is stored in DT10 to DT11, the following operation is performed. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1]...

  • Page 810: F331 Roff [Floating Point Data To 16-Bit Integer Conversion (Round-Off)]

    27.23 F331 ROFF [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round- off)] 27.23 F331 ROFF [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round-off)] Converts real number data to a 16-bit integer (rounded off to the nearest integer). ■ Instruction format ■...
  • Page 811 27.23 F331 ROFF [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round- off)] ● When the real number -1234.567 is stored in DT10 and DT11, the following operation will be performed. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1]...

  • Page 812: F332 Droff [Floating Point Data To 16-Bit Integer Conversion (Round-Off)]

    27.24 F332 DROFF [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round- off)] 27.24 F332 DROFF [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round-off)] Converts real number data to 32-bit integers (rounding off at the decimal point). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings...
  • Page 813 27.24 F332 DROFF [Floating Point Data to 16-bit Integer Conversion (Round- off)] ● If the real number -45678.51 is stored in DT10 and DT11, the following operation is performed. ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1]...

  • Page 814: F333 Fint (Floating Point Data Round-Down)

    27.25 F333 FINT (Floating Point Data Round-down) 27.25 F333 FINT (Floating Point Data Round-down) Rounds down real number data at the decimal point. (The largest integer not exceeding the floating point type data) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing operation data, or operation data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 815 27.25 F333 FINT (Floating Point Data Round-down) ● When the real number -1234.567 is stored in DT10 and DT11, the following operation will be performed. ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9008 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1] (ER)

  • Page 816: F334 Frint (Floating Point Data Round-Off)

    27.26 F334 FRINT (Floating Point Data Round-off) 27.26 F334 FRINT (Floating Point Data Round-off) Rounds off real number data to the first decimal place. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing operation data, or operation data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 817 27.26 F334 FRINT (Floating Point Data Round-off) ● When the real number -1234.567 is stored in DT10 and DT11, the following operation will be performed. ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9008 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1] (ER)

  • Page 818: F335 F+/- (Floating Point Data Sign Conversion)

    27.27 F335 F+/- (Floating Point Data Sign Conversion) 27.27 F335 F+/- (Floating Point Data Sign Conversion) Changes the sign of real number data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing operation data, or operation data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 819 27.27 F335 F+/- (Floating Point Data Sign Conversion) ● If the real number "-30000.00" is stored in DT10 to DT11, the following operation will be performed. ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9008 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1] (ER)

  • Page 820: F336 Fabs (Floating Point Data Absolute Value Conversion)

    27.28 F336 FABS (Floating Point Data Absolute Value Conversion) 27.28 F336 FABS (Floating Point Data Absolute Value Conversion) Calculates the absolute value of real number data. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing operation data, or operation data (two words) Area storing the operation results (two words) ■...
  • Page 821 27.28 F336 FABS (Floating Point Data Absolute Value Conversion) ● When the real number 1234.567 is stored in DT10 and DT11, the following operation will be performed. ● When the real number -1234.567 is stored in DT10 and DT11, the following operation will be performed.

  • Page 822: F337 Rad (Degree To Radian Conversion)

    27.29 F337 RAD (Degree to Radian Conversion) 27.29 F337 RAD (Degree to Radian Conversion) Converts the unit of an angle from [degrees] to [radians]. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle [degrees] data, or angle [degrees] (two words) Area (two word) to store the conversion result ■...
  • Page 823 27.29 F337 RAD (Degree to Radian Conversion) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9008 Turns ON when non-real number data is specified in [S, S+1] (ER) R9009 Turns ON when operation result overflows (CY) R900B Turns ON when the calculation result is"0"...

  • Page 824: F338 Deg (Radian To Degree Conversion)

    27.30 F338 DEG (Radian to Degree Conversion) 27.30 F338 DEG (Radian to Degree Conversion) Converts the unit of an angle from radians to degrees. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing angle data (radians), or angle data (radians) (two words) Area (two words) to store the conversion result ■...

  • Page 825: Program Example

    27.30 F338 DEG (Radian to Degree Conversion) ● If a K constant is specified for [S], the same process is performed as if an integer device was specified. ■ Program example When R0 turns to ON, f30.00000 is stored in DT20 and DT21. ■...
  • Page 826 (MEMO) 27-62 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 827: Real Number Data Processing Instructions

    28 Real Number Data Processing Instructions 28.1 F345 FCMP (Floating Point Data Comparison) ........28-2 28.2 F346 FWIN (Floating Point Data Band Comparison)......28-4 28.3 F347 FLIMT (Floating Point Data Upper/Lower Limit Control)..28-6 28.4 F348 FBAND (Floating Point Data Deadband Control) ....28-8 28.5 F349 FZONE (Floating Point Data Zone Control)......28-10 28.6 F354 FSCAL (Scaling of real number data)........28-12 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 828: F345 Fcmp (Floating Point Data Comparison)

    28.1 F345 FCMP (Floating Point Data Comparison) 28.1 F345 FCMP (Floating Point Data Comparison) Compares real number data and outputs the judgment result to special internal relays. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the real number data, or real number data (comparison data 1) (two words) Area storing the real number data, or real number data (comparison data 2) (two words) ■...
  • Page 829 28.1 F345 FCMP (Floating Point Data Comparison) Name Description (ER) Turns ON when non-real-number data is specified in [S1, S1+1] or [S2, S2+1] WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 28-3...

  • Page 830: F346 Fwin (Floating Point Data Band Comparison)

    28.2 F346 FWIN (Floating Point Data Band Comparison) 28.2 F346 FWIN (Floating Point Data Band Comparison) Compares real number data with a band and outputs the judgment result to special internal relays. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Comparison data: Area storing real number data, or real number data (two words) Lower limit data: Area storing real number data, or real number data (two words) Upper limit data: Area storing real number data, or real number data (two words) ■...
  • Page 831 28.2 F346 FWIN (Floating Point Data Band Comparison) ● If [S1] to [S3] are specified with an integer device, the operation occurs after the integer data is internally converted to real numbers. ● If a K constant is specified for [S1], [S2], or [S3], the same process is performed as if an integer device was specified.

  • Page 832: F347 Flimt (Floating Point Data Upper/Lower Limit Control)

    28.3 F347 FLIMT (Floating Point Data Upper/Lower Limit Control) 28.3 F347 FLIMT (Floating Point Data Upper/Lower Limit Control) Performs upper and lower limit control (real number data). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the lower limit, or lower limit data (two words) Area storing the upper limit, or upper limit data (two words) Area storing the input value, or input value data (two words) Area storing the output value (two words)
  • Page 833 28.3 F347 FLIMT (Floating Point Data Upper/Lower Limit Control) Output value [D, D+1] [S2, S2+1] Input value Upper limit value [S3, S3+1] [S2, S2+1] [S1, S1+1] ● If [S1] to [S3] are specified with an integer device, the operation occurs after the integer data is internally converted to real numbers.

  • Page 834: F348 Fband (Floating Point Data Deadband Control)

    28.4 F348 FBAND (Floating Point Data Deadband Control) 28.4 F348 FBAND (Floating Point Data Deadband Control) Performs dead-band control (real number data). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing the lower limit, or lower limit data (two words) Area storing the upper limit, or upper limit data (two words) Area storing the input value, or input value data (two words) Area storing the output value (two words)
  • Page 835 28.4 F348 FBAND (Floating Point Data Deadband Control) Output value [D, D+1] Deadband lower limit [S1, S1+1] Input value [S3, S3+1] Deadband upper limit [S2, S2+1] During this period, 0.0 is output. ● If [S1] to [S3] are specified with an integer device, the operation occurs after the integer data is internally converted to real numbers.

  • Page 836: F349 Fzone (Floating Point Data Zone Control)

    28.5 F349 FZONE (Floating Point Data Zone Control) 28.5 F349 FZONE (Floating Point Data Zone Control) Performs zone control (real number data). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Area storing negative bias values, or negative bias value data (two words) Area storing positive bias values, or positive bias value data (two words) Area storing the input value, or input value data (two words) Area storing the output value (two words)
  • Page 837 28.5 F349 FZONE (Floating Point Data Zone Control) Output value [D, D+1] [S2, S2+1] Input value [S3, S3+1] Bias value for negative case [S1, S1+1] ● If [S1] to [S3] are specified with an integer device, the operation occurs after the integer data is internally converted to real numbers.

  • Page 838: F354 Fscal (Scaling Of Real Number Data)

    28.6 F354 FSCAL (Scaling of real number data) 28.6 F354 FSCAL (Scaling of real number data) Performs scaling (linearization) using a real number data table and calculates the output (Y) for the input value (X). ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Real value or area representing the input value (X)
  • Page 839 28.6 F354 FSCAL (Scaling of real number data) Registration point DT10 count (m←n+1) S2+1: DT11 (Real number value) S2+2: DT12 S2+3: DT13 (Real number value) S2+4: DT14 DT29 S2+2n+1: (Real number value) S2+2n+2: DT30 DT31 S2+2n+3: (Real number value) DT32 S2+2n+4: S2+2n+5: DT33...
  • Page 840 28.6 F354 FSCAL (Scaling of real number data) (This occurs when the distance between two points cannot be represented by a real number.) e.g. First point: (x0, y0) = (HFF000000, HFF000000) = (-1.7*10 , -1.7*10 Second point: (x1,y1) = (H7F000000, H7F000000) = (+1.7*10 , +1.7*10 ●...

  • Page 841: Process Control Instructions

    29 Process Control Instructions 29.1 F355 PID (PID Operation)..............29-2 29.2 F356 EZPID (PID Operation: PWM Output Possible).......29-9 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 29-1...

  • Page 842: F355 Pid (Pid Operation)

    29.1 F355 PID (PID Operation) 29.1 F355 PID (PID Operation) PID operation is performed. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting number of parameter area (30 word) for PID operation ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...
  • Page 843 29.1 F355 PID (PID Operation) ■ Parameter table settings Control mode [S+1] Set point value (SP) Measured process value (PV) [S+2] [S+3] Output value (MV) [S+4] Output lower limit [S+5] Output upper limit [S+6] Proportional gain (Kp) Integral time (Ti) [S+7] [S+8] Derivative time (Td)
  • Page 844 29.1 F355 PID (PID Operation) ● Derivative priority type, proportional-derivative priority type PID There is a change in output when the setting value is changed. Derivative type Generally, there is significant fluctuation when the setting value is changed, but convergence is fast. Proportional- Generally, there is less fluctuation when the setting value is changed, but derivative type...
  • Page 845 29.1 F355 PID (PID Operation) The setting value range is K1 to K6000 (0.01 to 60.0 seconds, specified in units of 0.01 second). (11) Auto-tuning progress status [S+10] When auto-tuning is specified in the operation mode, the degree of progress of auto-tuning is displayed.
  • Page 846 29.1 F355 PID (PID Operation) (Reason) This is because the F355 PID instruction operates internally using the specified table, even when the execution condition is not met. In such cases, set the tables to separate addresses. ● See the following operational expressions regarding PID operation. ■...
  • Page 847 29.1 F355 PID (PID Operation) The resulting offset is removed by combining with proportional operation or proportional- derivative operation. The smaller the Ti value, the stronger the action of the integral operation. (3) Derivative operation Control operation that produces an output proportional to the time derivative value of the input. Set value signal SV Deviation e Differentiate...
  • Page 848 29.1 F355 PID (PID Operation) Set value signal SV Deviation e Integrate Output MV Differentiate Measured signal PV If the parameters in PID control are set to their optimal values, the control quantity can be quickly matched to the target value and maintained. ■...

  • Page 849: F356 Ezpid (Pid Operation: Pwm Output Possible)

    29.2 F356 EZPID (PID Operation: PWM Output Possible) 29.2 F356 EZPID (PID Operation: PWM Output Possible) Temperature control (PID) can be easily performed using the image of a temperature controller. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Control data Measured process value (PV) Starting No.
  • Page 850 29.2 F356 EZPID (PID Operation: PWM Output Possible) Bit 2 Turn this bit ON to hold the output MV (S4) when the execution condition of this instruction changes from OFF to ON. When this bit is OFF, MV is cleared. When bit 3 is 0 Specifies PWM output When bit 3 is 1...
  • Page 851 29.2 F356 EZPID (PID Operation: PWM Output Possible) ● Specify the set point value (SP) with the instruction or a display before the operation. ● If auto-tuning is requested with a device such as a display, the above auto-tuning request program is not necessary.
  • Page 852 29.2 F356 EZPID (PID Operation: PWM Output Possible) Memory Function Default Range: Forward operation: If the measured process value increases, the output is increased (example: cooling) Derivative-type and proportional-derivative type Derivative type: Approaches the set point value faster, but is more likely to overshoot.
  • Page 853 29.2 F356 EZPID (PID Operation: PWM Output Possible) Example: Change the control mode from the default = derivative type to the proportional-derivative type. 2. Using an analog output unit for output 1. Set the analog output flag (bit 3 of S1) to 1. 2.
  • Page 854 29.2 F356 EZPID (PID Operation: PWM Output Possible) ■ More details on setting methods 1. Setting the 100% output band (S4+3) The 100% output band specifies the percentage of the set value for the measured process value (PV) to be above when PID control is started. 100% output is performed in the area up to the specified process value.
  • Page 855 29.2 F356 EZPID (PID Operation: PWM Output Possible) Temperature Auto-tuning bias value (SP’) Auto-tuning during reverse operation Time Auto-tuning in progress PID control KP/TI/TD calculation Temperature (SP’) Auto-tuning during forward operation Auto-tuning bias value Time Auto-tuning in progress PID control KP/TI/TD calculation (Note 1) Even if auto-tuning is started when the measured process value (PV) is close to the set point value...
  • Page 856 29.2 F356 EZPID (PID Operation: PWM Output Possible) F356 EZPID DT32710 DT100 Incorrect F0 MV DT100 F356 EZPID DT32710 DT100 It is the same even without this OT Y0 instruction. Correct F0 MV DT100 ■ Conditions when operation errors occur ●...

  • Page 857: Positioning Control Instructions (Table Setting Mode)

    30 Positioning Control Instructions (Table Setting Mode) 30.1 F380 POSST (Positioning Table Start) ..........30-2 30.2 F381 JOGST (JOG Operation Start)..........30-4 30.3 F382 ORGST (Home Return Start)...........30-6 30.4 F383 MPOST (Positioning Simultaneous Start)........30-7 30.5 F384 PTBLR (Positioning Parameter Read)........30-9 30.6 F385 PTBLW (Positioning Parameter Write) ........30-11 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 30-1...

  • Page 858: F380 Posst (Positioning Table Start)

    30.1 F380 POSST (Positioning Table Start) 30.1 F380 POSST (Positioning Table Start) Starts the positioning operation according to the data specified in the positioning memory (positioning table area). This instruction is used to start the E point control, P point control, C point control, J point control or linear interpolation control.
  • Page 859 30.1 F380 POSST (Positioning Table Start) ● When the channel to be started has been already operating, the positioning control does not start and it terminates. ■ Flag operations Name Explanation When the area is exceeded at the time of index modification When the [S1] value is outside the set range R9007 R9008...

  • Page 860: F381 Jogst (Jog Operation Start)

    30.2 F381 JOGST (JOG Operation Start) 30.2 F381 JOGST (JOG Operation Start) Starts the JOG operation according to the parameters specified in the positioning memory (axis setting area). ■ Instruction format ■ Operand Operand Settings Setting range Channel number to start the JOG operation (Unsigned 16-bit 0 to 3 integer) Operating direction (Unsigned 16-bit integer)
  • Page 861 30.2 F381 JOGST (JOG Operation Start) ■ Flag operations Name Explanation When the area is exceeded at the time of index modification R9007 When the [S1] value is outside the set range R9008 When the [S2] value is outside the set range (ER) When the pulse output (table operation) has not been set in the system register WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 862: F382 Orgst (Home Return Start)

    30.3 F382 ORGST (Home Return Start) 30.3 F382 ORGST (Home Return Start) Starts the home return operation according to the parameters specified in the positioning memory (axis setting area). ■ Instruction format ■ Operand Operand Settings Setting range Channel number to start the home return (Unsigned 16-bit integer) 0 to 3 ■...

  • Page 863: F383 Mpost (Positioning Simultaneous Start)

    30.4 F383 MPOST (Positioning Simultaneous Start) 30.4 F383 MPOST (Positioning Simultaneous Start) Starts the positioning tables for multiple axes specified on Configurator PMX. The tables of the E point control, P point control and C point control can be started. ■...
  • Page 864 30.4 F383 MPOST (Positioning Simultaneous Start) ● Use F380 POSST instruction to start linear interpolation. When the table of the interpolation axis control has been specified with F383 MPOST instruction, a self-diagnostic error (positioning operation error) occurs. ■ Flag operations Name Explanation When the area is exceeded at the time of index modification...

  • Page 865: Outline Of Operation

    30.5 F384 PTBLR (Positioning Parameter Read) 30.5 F384 PTBLR (Positioning Parameter Read) Reads the positioning parameter data stored in the positioning memory of the unit to the operation memory area. ■ Instruction format ■ Operand Operand Settings Specification of channel numbers and positioning memory area (Higher 8 bits) channel no.: H0 to H3 H00 (Common area), H01 (Axis information area), H02 (Axis...
  • Page 866 30.5 F384 PTBLR (Positioning Parameter Read) ■ Flag operations Name Explanation When the [S1] value is outside the set range R9007 When the [S2] value exceeds the positioning area specified by [S1] R9008 When the no. of read words is"0" (ER) When the read data exceeds the area of [D] 30-10...

  • Page 867: F385 Ptblw (Positioning Parameter Write)

    30.6 F385 PTBLW (Positioning Parameter Write) 30.6 F385 PTBLW (Positioning Parameter Write) This instruction is used to write positioning parameters and positioning table data with user programs. ■ Instruction format ■ Operand Operand Settings Specification of channel numbers and positioning memory area (Higher 8 bits) channel no.: H0 to H3 (Not save in FROM), H80 to H83 (Save in FROM) H00 (Common area), H01 (Axis information area), H02 (Axis...
  • Page 868 30.6 F385 PTBLW (Positioning Parameter Write) ● When specifying [H80 to H83 (Save in FROM)] for the higher 8 bits of operand [S1] (the most significant bit is1), specified data is written into the F-ROM of the control unit. Writing to F- ROM can be performed up to 10000 times.

  • Page 869: Positioning Control Instructions

    31 Positioning Control Instructions 31.1 F1 DMV (Pulse Output Elapsed Value Write/Read)......31-2 31.2 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Trapezoidal Control)......31-3 31.3 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Home Return)........31-9 31.4 [F172(PSLH)] Pulse Output (JOG Operation)........31-14 31.5 [F174(SP0H)] Pulse Output (Selectable Data Table Control Operation) .....................31-17 31.6 [F175(SPSH)] Pulse Output (Linear Interpolation) ......31-22 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 31-1...

  • Page 870: F1 Dmv (Pulse Output Elapsed Value Write/Read)

    31.1 F1 DMV (Pulse Output Elapsed Value Write/Read) 31.1 F1 DMV (Pulse Output Elapsed Value Write/Read) Writes and reads the elapsed value of the high-speed counter. ■ Instruction format F1 DMV K3000 DT90400 （ ） F1 DMV DT90400 DT100 （ ）...

  • Page 871: F171(Spdh)] Pulse Output (Trapezoidal Control)

    31.2 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Trapezoidal Control) 31.2 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Trapezoidal Control) This instruction outputs pulses from a specified pulse output channel according to specified parameters. ■ Instruction format ■ Operand Operand Settings Starting number of the area in which data tables are registered Target channel for pulse output ■...
  • Page 872 31.2 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Trapezoidal Control) Selection PLS+SIGN PLS+SIGN Target value CW/CCW Forward OFF Forward ON Elapsed value Reverse ON Reverse OFF direction output is direction output is Pulse output when Pulse output when Pulse output from When minus Subtraction direction output is direction output is Absolute <Absolute value control>...
  • Page 873 31.2 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Trapezoidal Control) Control code ① Initial speed Fmin(Hz) ② Maximum speed Fmax(Hz) Acceleration/ ③ deceleration time t(ms) Target value ④ (No. of pulses) S+10 ⑤ S+11 Operand Settings Description Specify the control code by setting the H constant. 0: Fixed Acceleration/deceleration time setting 0: Normal...
  • Page 874 31.2 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Trapezoidal Control) Operand Settings Description (Note 1) If the initial speed is set to a value less than K1 or if the maximum speed is set to a value exceeding K100000, an operation error occurs. (Note 2) If the initial speed is set to the low-speed range and if the maximum speed is set to a value exceeding K22000, an operation error occurs.
  • Page 875 31.2 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Trapezoidal Control) 7kHz No. of output pulses 100,000 1kHz 300ms 300ms ⊿f ⊿t ● With 30 steps ⊿f =(7000-1000)/30 steps=200 (Hz) ⊿t =300 ms/30 steps=10 ms ● With 60 steps ⊿f = (7000-1000)/60 steps=100 (Hz) ⊿t =300 ms/60 steps=5 ms ■...
  • Page 876 ● This instruction cannot be executed when a control flag corresponding to each channel is on. ● For the FP0H mode, select "Pulse output" for the channel setting corresponding to the system register no. 402.

  • Page 877: F171(Spdh)] Pulse Output (Home Return)

    31.3 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Home Return) 31.3 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Home Return) This instruction outputs pulses from a specified pulse output channel according to specified parameters. ■ Instruction format ■ Operand Operand Settings Starting number of the area in which data tables are registered Target channel for pulse output ■...
  • Page 878 31.3 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Home Return) Home input Fmax Fmin Home return mode II (Home return by near home input and home input) When the near home input is enabled, deceleration will be performed, and the pulse output will stop after the home input. The operation varies according to the setting of the control code (low byte) described on the next page to H30 to H37.
  • Page 879 31.3 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Home Return) Operand Settings Description 0: Fixed Acceleration/deceleration time setting 0: Normal 1: Acceleration/deceleration time priority Output setting 0: Pulse output 1: Calculate only Acceleration/deceleration steps 0: 30 steps 1: 60 steps Duty (on width) 0: Duty 1/2 (50%) 1: Duty 1/4 (25%) Frequency range Not used...
  • Page 880 31.3 [F171(SPDH)] Pulse Output (Home Return) Operand Settings Description When this signal is not used or the time is set to less than 0.5 ms, tr(ms) specify K0. ■ Example of program ■ Regarding the specification of acceleration/deceleration time For specifying acceleration/deceleration time, No. of steps and initial speed, set the value to be calculated by the formula below.
  • Page 881 ● This instruction cannot be executed when a control flag corresponding to each channel is on. ● For the FP0H mode, select "Pulse output" for the channel setting corresponding to the system register no. 402.

  • Page 882: F172(Pslh)] Pulse Output (Jog Operation)

    31.4 [F172(PSLH)] Pulse Output (JOG Operation) 31.4 [F172(PSLH)] Pulse Output (JOG Operation) Outputs the pulse of a specified parameter from a specified channel. ■ Instruction format （ ） F172 PLSH DT10 ■ Operand Operand Settings Starting number of the area in which data tables are registered Target channel for pulse output ■...
  • Page 883 31.4 [F172(PSLH)] Pulse Output (JOG Operation) Operand Settings Description 0: Fixed Acceleration/deceleration steps 0: Mode with no target value 1: Target value match stop mode Duty (on width) 0: Duty 1/2 (50%) 1: Duty 1/4 (25%) Frequency range Not used Output method 00: No counting CW 01: No counting CCW...
  • Page 884 ● When describing the same channel in both the normal program and the interrupt program, be sure to program not to execute them simultaneously. ● For the FP0H mode, select "Pulse output" for the channel setting corresponding to the system register no. 402.

  • Page 885: F174(Sp0H)] Pulse Output (Selectable Data Table Control Operation)

    31.5 [F174(SP0H)] Pulse Output (Selectable Data Table Control Operation) 31.5 [F174(SP0H)] Pulse Output (Selectable Data Table Control Operation) Outputs pulses from a specified pulse output channel according to a specified data table. ■ Instruction format ■ Operand Operand Settings Starting number of the area in which data tables are registered Target channel for pulse output ■...
  • Page 886 31.5 [F174(SP0H)] Pulse Output (Selectable Data Table Control Operation) ■ Data table settings ① Control code ② Frequency 1 Target value 1 ③ (Pulse number) Frequency 2 Target value 2 (Pulse number) S+2n Frequency n S+2(n+1) Target value n (Pulse number) S+2(n+2) ④...

  • Page 887: Example Of Program

    31.5 [F174(SP0H)] Pulse Output (Selectable Data Table Control Operation) Operand Settings Description Range Initial speed Maximum speed High K50 to K100000 K50 to K100000（50Hz to speed 100kHz） （50Hz to 100kHz） When the frequency 1 (initial speed) is the low speed range and the frequency n is not in the range between 1 Hz to 22 kHz, the pulse output stops.
  • Page 888 F174(SP0H) instruction has turned ON. ● This instruction cannot be executed when a control flag corresponding to each channel is ● For the FP0H mode, select "Pulse output" for the channel setting corresponding to the system register no. 402. ● For the FPsigma mode, select "Do not use high-speed counter" for the channel setting corresponding to the system register nos.
  • Page 889 31.5 [F174(SP0H)] Pulse Output (Selectable Data Table Control Operation) ● When the control code or frequency 1 is any value outside of the settable range, an operation error occurs. (When the data of the frequency 1 is 0, nothing is executed and the operation ends.) ●...

  • Page 890: F175(Spsh)] Pulse Output (Linear Interpolation)

    ■ Instruction format ■ Operand Operand Settings Starting number of the area in which data tables are registered FP0H mode: 0 or 2, FPsigma mode: 0 (Fixed) ■ Memory area type that can be specified Constant Index Operand modifier ●...
  • Page 891 31.6 [F175(SPSH)] Pulse Output (Linear Interpolation) ■ Data table settings ① Control code Composite speed Initial speed Fmin(Hz) ② Composite speed Setting area Maximum speed Fmax(Hz) Specify by user programs. Acceleration/deceleration time ③ T(ms) X-axis Target value (Movement amount) ④ Y-axis S+10 Target value (Movement amount)
  • Page 892 31.6 [F175(SPSH)] Pulse Output (Linear Interpolation) Operand Settings Description Fmin(Hz) (However, for 1.5 Hz, the angle is 0 degree or 90 degrees only. Also, for specifying 1.5 Hz, specify K1.) ● When the component speed becomes lower than the minimum speed in each frequency range, it will be a corrected component speed.
  • Page 893 31.6 [F175(SPSH)] Pulse Output (Linear Interpolation) Settin Operand Description Y-axis Comp onent S+16 speed Initial speed Fymin Y-axis Comp onent speed S+18 Maxim speed Fymax X-axis The frequency ranges are automatically selected by the system for the components of each axis. Frequ S+20 ency...
  • Page 894 ● When describing the same channel in both the normal program and the interrupt program, be sure to program not to execute them simultaneously. ● For the FP0H mode, select "Pulse output" for the channel setting corresponding to the system register no. 402.

  • Page 895: Logging/Trace Control Instruction

    32 Logging/Trace Control Instruction 32.1 F420 LOGST (Logging trace start request) ........32-2 32.2 F421 LOGED (Logging trace stop request) ........32-3 32.3 F422 LOGSMPL (Sampling Trace)...........32-4 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 32-1...

  • Page 896: F420 Logst (Logging Trace Start Request)

    32.1 F420 LOGST (Logging trace start request) 32.1 F420 LOGST (Logging trace start request) Requests to start a logging trace. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Number of logging trace requested to start ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...

  • Page 897: F421 Loged (Logging Trace Stop Request)

    32.2 F421 LOGED (Logging trace stop request) 32.2 F421 LOGED (Logging trace stop request) Requests to stop a logging trace. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Number of logging trace requested to stop ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand...

  • Page 898: F422 Logsmpl (Sampling Trace)

    32.3 F422 LOGSMPL (Sampling Trace) 32.3 F422 LOGSMPL (Sampling Trace) Requests data logging for logging trace. ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Logging trace number for data logging ■ Devices that can be specified (indicated by ●) Constant Integer Operand Index WX WY WR WL SV...

  • Page 899: Sd Card Access Instructions

    33.14 F438 CFREE (SD memory card free space acquisition: byte units) .....................33-58 33.15 F439 CFREEK (SD Memory Card Free Space Acquisition: Kilobyte Units) ..................33-60 33.16 F440 CFLS (File status acquisition)..........33-62 33.17 F441 PanaSD (Read of lifetime information of Panasonic SD card) ......................33-65 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 33-1...

  • Page 900: Common Precautions For Sd Memory Card Access Instructions

    33.1 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions 33.1 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions ■ Instruction operation ● At the start of instruction execution, checks are conducted to confirm whether a SD memory card is inserted or not, if the cover is closed, and whether the card is write-protected or not. ●...
  • Page 901 33.1 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions Code Name Description Related instructions Code that cannot be specified for a file name is used. Folder access and file access Specified file name error instructions There are too many hierarchies for the specified folder.
  • Page 902 33.1 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions ● When specifying a non-existent folder when using instructions F437 CWT, F429 CMKDIR or F433 CPR, only a subfolder directly under the parent folder can be automatically created. Two or more new folders cannot be created by one instruction. If specifying more than two folders, a no specified file error occurs.
  • Page 903 33.1 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions <Example> When specifying 5 for the number of characters, and "ABCDE" for the character data table "B" "A" "D" "C" "E" Byte address Higher Lower ● Include the extension in the file name specification. WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 33-5...

  • Page 904: F425 Cdtwt (File Write Of Operation Memory In Bin Format)

    33.2 F425 CDTWT (File Write of Operation Memory in BIN Format) 33.2 F425 CDTWT (File Write of Operation Memory in BIN Format) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the operation memory device storing the data to be written. Number of data items to be written.
  • Page 905 33.2 F425 CDTWT (File Write of Operation Memory in BIN Format) [S] …DT110 [n] …K5 [D] …10 H 0108 DT108 File dt010.bin (16-bit binary format) H 0109 DT109 DT110 H 0110 1001110112 0113011401 H 0111 DT111 H 0112 DT112 DT113 H 0113 DT114 H 0114...

  • Page 906: F426 Cdtrd (Read From Bin Format File To Operation Memory)

    33.3 F426 CDTRD (Read from BIN Format File to Operation Memory) 33.3 F426 CDTRD (Read from BIN Format File to Operation Memory) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Number of the file (three digits) in the SD memory card on which the data to be read is stored. Range: 0 to 999 Number of data items to be read.
  • Page 907 33.3 F426 CDTRD (Read from BIN Format File to Operation Memory) [S] …10 [n] …K5 [D] …DT110 H 0108 DT108 H 0108 DT108 File dt010.bin (16-bit binary format) H 0109 H 0109 DT109 DT109 DT110 H 0110 DT110 H 0225 25022602270228022902 H 0111 H 0226...

  • Page 908: F427 Cwt (File Data Write Instruction)

    33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the device storing the data to be written (data format: unsigned 16-bit integer) Number of write data items (data format: unsigned 16-bit integer) Starting address of the device storing the path name and number of characters of the file to be written Specify the number of characters in [D1] and the path name (folder name + file name: maximum 256 characters) in [D1+1] and following addresses...
  • Page 909 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) 2: When rewriting a file, a 0-byte file is created. 3: When appending to a file, only the file date is changed. ■ [D1]: Specification of folder and file name Setting device Description Specifies the number of characters used in the folder name and file name of the file to be written.
  • Page 910 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) ■ [D2+1]: Specification of write mode Set value of D2+1 Description Deletes the file contents and then writes data. When no file exists, a new one 0: New file mode is created. Writes additional data from the end of the file. When no file exists, a new one is 1: Add mode created.
  • Page 911 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) Specified Description bits 1 to 255: Line breaks are inserted in comma-separated data the specified number of times. [D2] When K10 ASCII or K11 BIN is specified for the save format, the line break setting is invalid.
  • Page 912 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) [D2] Write format Zero suppression: ON (zero suppression Zero suppression: OFF (no performed) zero suppression) ␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣- 1 -0000000001 ␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣ 0 ␣000000000000 ␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣ - 1 -000000000001 Floating point real number ␣␣␣␣␣␣␣␣1E-10 ␣00000001E-10 32bit ␣␣␣␣␣1.234567 ␣00001.234567 -3.402823E+38 -3.402823E+38...
  • Page 913 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) Write mode Operation Data is written from the end of the file unconditionally. Add mode The writing position (file pointer) is not stored after the writing process is completed. ■ [D2+5], [D2+6]: Number of data items that could be written ●...
  • Page 914 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) Example 2) ● Five items of unsigned 32-bit integer data (10 words) are read from the area starting from device DT4. The read data is written to the file "\abc\data1.csv" in the SD memory card in new file mode.
  • Page 915 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) [D1] …"¥abc¥data1.csv" [D2] …DT100 [S] …DT2 [n] …K5 DT１ K123 ・・・Head of device to be K1234 read K12345 K567 K5678 K56789 Written file: data1.csv DT100 ・・・Writing format 00123,01234,12345 (0Dh)(0Ah) H 0000 DT10１ ・・・Writing mode 00005,00056 (0Dh)(0Ah) DT102 H 0003...
  • Page 916 Example 6) ● 10,000 items of signed 16-bit integer data (10,000 words) are read from the area starting from device DT10000. The read data is written to "\FP0H\DT.CSV" in the SD memory card in new file mode. ● A blank line is inserted in the data through zero suppression, and a line break (0Dh+0Ah) is inserted at the 10th data separation and at the end of the file.
  • Page 917 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) [S] …DT10000 [n] …K10000 [D1] …"¥FP0H¥DT.CSV" [D2] …DT50 K10000 DT10000 ・・・Head of K10001 DT10001 device to be read K10002 DT10002 ・ ・ ・ K19997 DT19997 DT19998 K19998 DT19999 K19999 DT20000 DT50 ・・・Writing format...
  • Page 918 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) [D1] …"¥abc¥data1.bin" [D2] …DT100 [S] …DT2 [n] …K5 DT１ K123 ・・・Head of K1234 device to be read K12345 K567 K5678 K56789 Written file: data1.bin DT100 ・・・Writing format H 0000 DT10１ ・・・Writing mode 7B00D204393005003800 DT102 H 0000 ・・・Option (*)
  • Page 919 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) [D1] …"¥abc¥data1.bin" [D2] …DT100 [S] …DT2 [n] …K5 DT１ K123 ・・・Head of device to be K1234 read K12345 K567 K5678 K56789 Written file: data1.bin 111122227 B00D2043930050038008888 DT100 ・・・Writing format DT10１ H 0002 ・・・Writing mode File pointer DT102 H 0000...
  • Page 920 33.4 F427 CWT (File Data Write Instruction) Name Description Turns ON when a value outside the specifiable range is specified in the area reserved for the system. 33-22 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 921: Instruction Format

    33.5 F428 CRD (Read File Data) 33.5 F428 CRD (Read File Data) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Description Starting address of the device storing the path name and number of characters in the file from which to read data Specify number of characters in [S1] and the path name in [S1+1] and later (folder name + filename: maximum 256 characters) Starting address of the device where parameters related to data to be read are stored...
  • Page 922 33.5 F428 CRD (Read File Data) Setting device Description Specify the file path of the file to be read. S1+1 to S1+128 ● Specify the full path, up to 256 characters including the folder name and file name (Note 1) When using the tool software FPWIN GR7, you can directly enter the path name (folder name and file name) as character constants.
  • Page 923 33.5 F428 CRD (Read File Data) ■ [S2+1]: Specification of reading mode Set value of S2+1 Description 0: Normal mode Always reads data from the beginning of the file. Always reads data from the beginning of the file. 1: Normal mode *The same operation as mode 0.

  • Page 924: Processing Examples

    33.5 F428 CRD (Read File Data) Example 2: When the number of data items to be read is 40 and 30 data items exist in the file, the first 30 data items read from the beginning of the file are stored. Example 3: When the number of read characters is 40 and 100 characters exist in the file, the first 40 characters read from the beginning of the file are stored.
  • Page 925 33.5 F428 CRD (Read File Data) ● As the "Reading position specification mode 1" is selected, the file pointer moves after reading. [n] …K5 [D] …DT102 [S1] …"¥abc¥data1.csv" [S2] …DT50 DT50 ・・・Reading format H 0002 DT5１ ・・・Reading mode DT52 H 0000 ・・・Reserved for system DT53 H 00000000...
  • Page 926 33.5 F428 CRD (Read File Data) [n] …K5 [D] …DT102 [S1] …"¥abc¥data1.csv" [S2] …DT50 DT50 ・・・Reading format H 0002 DT51 ・・・Reading mode DT52 H 0000 ・・・Reserved for system DT53 H 00000000 ・・・Reading position DT54 DT55 ・・・No. of read data DT56 Data content of file "data1.csv"...
  • Page 927 File pointer Example 5) ● Read 10000 data items from the file "\FP0H\DT.CSV" in an SD memory card. The read data is stored in the area starting from DT10000 (10000 words) as 16-bit signed integer data. ● As the "Normal mode 0" is selected, data is always read from the beginning of the file.
  • Page 928 33.5 F428 CRD (Read File Data) [S1] …"¥FP0H¥DT.CSV" [S2] …DT50 [n] …K10000 [D] …DT10000 DT50 ・・・Reading format H 0000 DT51 ・・・Reading mode DT52 H 0000 ・・・Reserved for system DT53 H 00000000 ・・・Reading position DT54 DT55 ・・・No. of read data DT56 Data content of file "DT.CSV“...
  • Page 929 33.5 F428 CRD (Read File Data) ● When reading ASCII data, correct processing may not be possible if there are delimiters (commas and/or line break codes) in the data. ● Specify the points at which each data is separated for [S2+3] and [S2+4] reading positions (file pointers).

  • Page 930: F429 Cmkdir (Create Directory)

    33.6 F429 CMKDIR (create directory) 33.6 F429 CMKDIR (create directory) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of device storing the path name and number of characters of the folder to be created Specify number of characters in [S] and path name in [S+1] onwards (folder name: maximum 256 characters) ■...
  • Page 931 33.6 F429 CMKDIR (create directory) ■ Processing examples Example 1) When creating folder "\abc" within the SD memory card ・・・ No. of characters of folder name “a” “¥” ・・・ Folder name “c” “b” H 0000 H 0000 H 0000 Byte address High memory memory...
  • Page 932 33.6 F429 CMKDIR (create directory) ● The SD memory card access instruction execution in progress flag (R917A) turns ON from when the execution condition turns ON to when execution of the instruction is complete. During this time other SD memory card access instructions cannot be executed. ●...

  • Page 933: F430 Crmdir/F431 Crmdirfl (Directory Deletion)

    33.7 F430 CRMDIR/F431 CRMDIRFL (Directory Deletion) 33.7 F430 CRMDIR/F431 CRMDIRFL (Directory Deletion) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the device storing the path name and number of characters of the folder to be deleted Specify the number of characters in [S] and the path name in [S+1] and later (folder name: maximum 256 characters) ■...
  • Page 934 33.7 F430 CRMDIR/F431 CRMDIRFL (Directory Deletion) Setting device Description Specifies the name of the folder to be deleted. (Full path specification of folder name up to S+1 to S+128 256 characters) (Note 1) Path names (folder names) can be directly input with character constants using the tool software FPWIN GR7.
  • Page 935 33.7 F430 CRMDIR/F431 CRMDIRFL (Directory Deletion) Example 2: When deleting folder "\abc\def" from the SD memory card ・・・No. of characters of folder name “a” “¥” ・・・ Folder name “b” “c” “d” “¥” “f” “e” H 0000 High Byte address memory memory card card...
  • Page 936 33.7 F430 CRMDIR/F431 CRMDIRFL (Directory Deletion) Name Description R9007 Turns ON if the specified destination is an out-of-range device R9008 when the device specification is indirect access (index modification). (ER) 33-38 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 937: F432 Cfdel (Delete File)

    33.8 F432 CFDEL (delete file) 33.8 F432 CFDEL (delete file) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the device storing the path name and number of characters of the file to be deleted Specify number of characters in [S] and path name in [S+1] onwards (folder name + file name: maximum 256 characters) ■...
  • Page 938 33.8 F432 CFDEL (delete file) ■ Processing examples e.g. Deleting the file "\abc\data1.csv" within the SD memory card ① “a” “¥” “c” “b” “d” “¥” ② “t” “a” “1” “a” “c” “.” “v” “s” Byte address High ¥abc ¥abc data1.csv ■...

  • Page 939: F433 Cpr (Ascii Data Write Into File)

    33.9 F433 CPR (ASCII Data Write into File) 33.9 F433 CPR (ASCII Data Write into File) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Description Starting address of the device that stores the string data to be written, or the string Specify the number of characters in [S] and the string data (maximum 4096 characters) in [S+1] and following addresses Starting address of the device that stores the path name of the file to be written to and the number of characters...
  • Page 940 33.9 F433 CPR (ASCII Data Write into File) Setting device Description Specify the number of characters of the file name to be written. (Full path specification) Specify the file to be written. D+1 to D+128 ● The full path configuration is up to a maximum of 256 characters including the folder name + filename ■...
  • Page 941 33.9 F433 CPR (ASCII Data Write into File) ■ Precautions for programming ● Also refer to section "33.1 Common Precautions for SD Memory Card Access Instructions". ● The SD memory card access instruction execution in progress flag (R917A) turns ON from when the execution condition turns ON to when execution of the instruction is complete.

  • Page 942: F434 Crd1 (Read One Line From File)

    33.10 F434 CRD1 (Read one line from file) 33.10 F434 CRD1 (Read one line from file) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the device storing the path name and number of characters in the file from which to read data Specify number of characters in [S] and the path name in [S+1] and later (folder name + filename: maximum 256 characters)
  • Page 943 33.10 F434 CRD1 (Read one line from file) ■ [D2] to [D2+3]: Specification of read position and upper limit Setting device Settings Details Specifies the byte position from the start of the file. Line break characters [CR(0DH) or LF(0AH)] are each counted as one character. After the instruction is executed, [D2, D2+1] is updated with a read Read position pointer value that has had the number of bytes that were read added...
  • Page 944 33.10 F434 CRD1 (Read one line from file) ■ Processing examples Example 1: When file"\data1.txt" is read with file start set as the read position [S] …DT0 [D1] …DT100 [D2] …DT50 H 0000 DT100 DT50 H 00000000 ・・・From the head of file “d”...
  • Page 945 33.10 F434 CRD1 (Read one line from file) Example 2: When file"\data1.txt" is read with the 4th byte from the file start set as the read position [S] …DT0 [D1] …DT100 [D2] …DT50 H 0000 DT100 DT50 ・・・Position of 4th byte H 00000004 “d”...
  • Page 946 33.10 F434 CRD1 (Read one line from file) Example 3: When file"\abc\data1.txt" is read with the 10th byte from the file start set as the read position [S] …DT0 [D1] …DT100 [D2] …DT50 DT100 H 0000 DT50 ・・・ Position of 9th byte H 0000000A “a”...
  • Page 947 33.10 F434 CRD1 (Read one line from file) ■ Flag operations Name Description R917A (SD memory card access instruction Turns ON when instruction execution starts. Turns OFF when execution in progress) instruction execution is complete. R917B (SD memory card access instruction Turns OFF when instruction execution starts.

  • Page 948: F435 Cren (Rename File)

    33.11 F435 CREN (Rename File) 33.11 F435 CREN (Rename File) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the device storing the path name and number of characters of the file to be renamed Specify number of characters in [S1] and the path name in [S1+1] and later (folder name + filename: maximum 256 characters) Starting address of the device storing the path name and number of characters of the renamed file Specify number of characters in [S2] and the path name in [S2+1] and later (folder name + filename:...
  • Page 949 33.11 F435 CREN (Rename File) ① ① DT50 “a” “¥” DT51 “a” “d” “c” “b” DT52 “a” “t” ② “d” “¥” DT53 “.” “2” ② “t” “a” DT54 “s” “c” “1” “a” “v” DT55 “c” “.” DT56 “v” “s” Byte address High Byte address High...

  • Page 950: F436 Ccopy (File Copy)

    33.12 F436 CCOPY (File Copy) 33.12 F436 CCOPY (File Copy) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the device storing the path name and number of characters of the copy source file Specify number of characters in [S1], path name in [S1+1] and later (folder name + filename: maximum 256 characters) Starting address of the device storing the path name and number of characters of the copy destination file...
  • Page 951 33.12 F436 CCOPY (File Copy) Setting device Description Set the number of characters of the name of the file to be copied. (Full path specification) Specify the file to be copied. S1+1 to S1+128 ● The full path configuration is up to a maximum of 256 characters including the folder name + filename ■...
  • Page 952 33.12 F436 CCOPY (File Copy) ① ① DT50 H 0000 DT90 “a” “¥” DT51 “d” “¥” “c” “b” DT52 “f” “e” DT53 “d” “¥” “t” “¥” ② ② “t” “a” DT54 “s” “e” “1” “a” DT55 “1” “t” “c” “.” “c”...

  • Page 953: F437 Cmv (File Transfer)

    33.13 F437 CMV (File Transfer) 33.13 F437 CMV (File Transfer) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the device that stores the path name and number of characters of the file to be transferred Specify number of characters in [S1], path name in [S1+1] and later (folder name + filename: maximum 256 characters) Starting address of the device that stores the path name and number of characters of the destination file...
  • Page 954 33.13 F437 CMV (File Transfer) Setting device Description Set the number of characters in the name of the file to be transferred. (Full path specification) Specify the file to be transferred. S1+1 to S1+128 ● The full path configuration is up to a maximum of 256 characters including the folder name + filename ■...
  • Page 955 33.13 F437 CMV (File Transfer) ① ① DT50 H 0000 DT90 “a” “¥” DT51 “d” “¥” “c” “b” DT52 “f” “e” ② ② DT53 “d” “¥” “t” “¥” “t” “a” DT54 “s” “e” “1” “a” DT55 “2” “t” Byte address Byte address High High...

  • Page 956: F438 Cfree (Sd Memory Card Free Space Acquisition: Byte Units)

    33.14 F438 CFREE (SD memory card free space acquisition: byte units) 33.14 F438 CFREE (SD memory card free space acquisition: byte units) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the device storing the acquired free space in byte units ■...
  • Page 957 33.14 F438 CFREE (SD memory card free space acquisition: byte units) Name Description Indicates the execution results when instruction execution is R917C (SD memory card access instruction complete. execution results) Normal end = 0, abnormal end = 1 R9007 Turns ON if the specified destination is an out-of-range device R9008 when the device specification is indirect access (index modification).

  • Page 958: F439 Cfreek (Sd Memory Card Free Space Acquisition: Kilobyte Units)

    33.15 F439 CFREEK (SD Memory Card Free Space Acquisition: Kilobyte Units) 33.15 F439 CFREEK (SD Memory Card Free Space Acquisition: Kilobyte Units) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the device storing the acquired free space in kilobyte units ■...
  • Page 959 33.15 F439 CFREEK (SD Memory Card Free Space Acquisition: Kilobyte Units) Name Description Indicates the execution results when instruction execution is R917C (SD memory card access instruction complete. execution results) Normal end = 0, abnormal end = 1 R9007 Turns ON if the specified destination is an out-of-range device R9008 when the device specification is indirect access (index modification).

  • Page 960: F440 Cfls (File Status Acquisition)

    33.16 F440 CFLS (File status acquisition) 33.16 F440 CFLS (File status acquisition) ■ Instruction format ■ Operands Items Settings Starting address of the device storing the path name and number of characters to acquire from the file from which the file status is to be read. Specify number of characters in [S] and the path name in [S+1] and later (folder name + filename: maximum 256 characters) Starting address of the device storing the acquired file status...
  • Page 961 33.16 F440 CFLS (File status acquisition) Device storing acquired Acquired contents result File size: Stored as a decimal number. Year (0 to 99) Month (1 to 12) Day (1 to 31) Last modified: Stored as a decimal number. Hours (0 to 23) Minutes (0 to 59) Seconds (0 to 59) ■...
  • Page 962 33.16 F440 CFLS (File status acquisition) ■ Flag operations Name Description R917A (SD memory card access instruction Turns ON when instruction execution starts. Turns OFF when execution in progress) instruction execution is complete. R917B (SD memory card access instruction Turns OFF when instruction execution starts. Turns ON when execution complete) instruction execution is complete.

  • Page 963: F441 Panasd (Read Of Lifetime Information Of Panasonic Sd Card)

    ● It is recommended to avoid frequent execution of this instruction and to execute it as a differential instruction. ● This is a dedicated instruction for use with SD memory cards manufactured by Panasonic. It cannot be used with any other SD memory cards. The Panasonic SD memory card series compatible with this instruction are shown below.
  • Page 964 33.17 F441 PanaSD (Read of lifetime information of Panasonic SD card) ■ Execution result storage area Operands Items Description Stores the execution result code. HFFFF: Executing Execution result H0: Normal end code [D1] H1: Dual-boot error (Note 1) H2: SD memory card cover open error...
  • Page 965 33.17 F441 PanaSD (Read of lifetime information of Panasonic SD card) ■ Flag operations Name Description R9007 Set when the [D2] to [D2+2] range exceeds the accessible range. R9008 Set when executed in an interrupt program. (ER) WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091 33-67...
  • Page 966 (MEMO) 33-68 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 967: Ethernet Instructions

    34 Ethernet Instructions 34.1 F460 IPv4SET (Ipv4 Address Setting) ..........34-2 34.2 F461 CONSET (Connection Setting) ..........34-7 34.3 F462 OPEN (Connection Open) ............34-14 34.4 F463 CLOSE (Connection Close).............34-16 34.5 F464 RDET (Ethernet Status Read) ..........34-18 34.6 F465 ETSTAT (EtherNet Information Acquisition) ......34-21 34.7 P466 NTPcREQ (Time Adjustment Request) ........34-25 34.8 F467 NTPcSV (NTP Destination Server Setting)......34-31 34.9 P468 PINGREQ (PING Send Request) ..........34-36...

  • Page 968: F460 Ipv4Set (Ipv4 Address Setting)

    34.1 F460 IPv4SET (Ipv4 Address Setting) 34.1 F460 IPv4SET (Ipv4 Address Setting) ■ Instruction format R9341 F469 K100 （ ） UNITSEL F460 “IP=192.168.1.5,MASK=255.255.255.0, IPv4SET GWIP=192.168.1.1” (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No.
  • Page 969 34.1 F460 IPv4SET (Ipv4 Address Setting) ● If this instruction is executed when IP address is outside the permissible range, a special relay R9009 (carry flag CY) is set, and no operation is performed. Check"List of usable IP addresses". ● This instruction can be executed when the Ethernet initialization in progress flag (R9341) is OFF.

  • Page 970: Setting Example

    34.1 F460 IPv4SET (Ipv4 Address Setting) (Note 3) Specify keywords in the order indicated in the table above. Setting example Examp “IP=192.168.1.5, MASK=255.255.255.0, GWIP=192.168.1.1” le 1 Settings IP address = 192.168.1.5; Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0; Default gateway = 192.168.1.1 Examp “IP=192.168.1.5, MASK=255.255.255.0, GWIP=0”...

  • Page 971: Timing Chart

    34.1 F460 IPv4SET (Ipv4 Address Setting) ● Once initialization is requested, the unit will close all connections and disconnect communication. ● The unit turns OFF the IP address established flag (R9342) and initializes the Ethernet unit with the value specified in the system work area. ●...
  • Page 972 34.1 F460 IPv4SET (Ipv4 Address Setting) Name Description To be set when executed in an interrupt program. Set when the number of characters for operand specifying character constant exceeds 256. Set in the case of execution while IP address is incorrect. The detailed code to be set in DT90529 is"1: Incorrect IP address specification".

  • Page 973: F461 Conset (Connection Setting)

    34.2 F461 CONSET (Connection Setting) 34.2 F461 CONSET (Connection Setting) ■ Instruction format (Note 1) Specify S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) in advance using F469 UNITSEL instruction. (Note 2) By copying & pasting the following text into the instruction list box of FPWIN GR7, the operand section of the program example above can be entered.
  • Page 974 34.2 F461 CONSET (Connection Setting) ● If the connection within the range specified byD1andD2includes the connection of a multi- connection server, an operation error occurs. ● If an incorrect IP address is specified, a special relay R9009 (carry flag CY) is set, and no operation is performed.
  • Page 975 34.2 F461 CONSET (Connection Setting) Items Settings MEWDAT : Specify MEWTOCOL-DAT. MC3EBIN : Specify MC Protocol (3E BINARY). : Specify general-purpose communication. Specify protocol options. Available options differ according to operation modes. OPTAV: Option available; OPTNAV: Option not available Option is not Operation mode selection Option is available.
  • Page 976 34.2 F461 CONSET (Connection Setting) Open method (Automatic / Manual): Open automatically, Communication type: TCP/IP Exampl “GP,OPTNAV,SV,AUTO,TCP” Operation mode setting: GP, Option setting: Option not available, Settings Open method (Server / Client): Server (any destination unit), Open method (Automatic / Manual): Open automatically, Communication type: TCP/IP ■...
  • Page 977 34.2 F461 CONSET (Connection Setting) Items Settings * When specifying IPv4, 000.000.000.000 (0.0.0.0) cannot be specified. * When specified, CY flag (R9009) turns ON and “1” (IP address error) is set to (Essential) DT90529, and the process is terminated. * An operation error does not occur. The setting is not made. Destination Specify the port No.
  • Page 978 34.2 F461 CONSET (Connection Setting) ● When the operation mode of S1 is set to general-purpose communication, a general-purpose receive buffer can be set. Perform setting by adding a general-purpose receive buffer size to the general-purpose receive buffer starting address, from the setting start connection number to the setting end connection number.
  • Page 979 34.2 F461 CONSET (Connection Setting) ■ OperandD1setting ● Specify either the device address storing a setting start connection number, or a constant. Items Settings Setting range Setting start connection No. Specify a setting start connection No. 1 to max. 9 ■...

  • Page 980: F462 Open (Connection Open)

    34.3 F462 OPEN (Connection Open) 34.3 F462 OPEN (Connection Open) ■ Instruction format (Note 1) Specify S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) in advance using F469 UNITSEL instruction. ■ Operand Items Settings Either the device address storing a connection number to be opened, or a constant. ■...
  • Page 981 34.3 F462 OPEN (Connection Open) ● This instruction is not available in interrupt programs. ■ Operand S setting Specify either the device address storing a connection number to be opened, or a constant. Setting Items Settings range Connection No. Specify a connection No. 1 to 9 ■...

  • Page 982: F463 Close (Connection Close)

    34.4 F463 CLOSE (Connection Close) 34.4 F463 CLOSE (Connection Close) ■ Instruction format (Note 1) Specify S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) in advance using F469 UNITSEL instruction. ■ Operand Items Settings Either the device address storing a connection number to be closed, or a constant. ■...
  • Page 983 34.4 F463 CLOSE (Connection Close) ■ Precautions for programming ● Immediately before this instruction, insert F469 (UNITSEL) instruction, and specify the unit (Ethernet communication) and connection No. ● This instruction is not available in interrupt programs. ■ Operand S setting Specify either the device address storing a connection number to be closed, or a constant.

  • Page 984: F464 Rdet (Ethernet Status Read)

    34.5 F464 RDET (Ethernet Status Read) 34.5 F464 RDET (Ethernet Status Read) ■ Instruction format (Note 1) Specify S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) in advance using F469 UNITSEL instruction. ■ Operand Items Settings Stored in the starting 7-word area (D to D+6) that stores status information. ■...
  • Page 985 34.5 F464 RDET (Ethernet Status Read) ■ Ethernet status information Operan Data name Stored data Lower word 0: Other than Connection status “Connected” summary Higher word The data is stored in the 1: Connected corresponding bit allocated in Lower word 0: Close the table below.
  • Page 986 34.5 F464 RDET (Ethernet Status Read) Name Description When connection specified by F469 (UNITSEL) does not exist, or the value is outside the range (ER) The device to store parameters specified by D is incorrect. 34-20 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 987: Instruction Format

    34.6 F465 ETSTAT (EtherNet Information Acquisition) 34.6 F465 ETSTAT (EtherNet Information Acquisition) ■ Instruction format (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying S1=K100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No. 1) using F469 (UNITSEL) instruction. (Note 2) By copying & pasting the the following text into the instruction list box of FPWIN GR7, the operand section of the program example above can be entered.
  • Page 988 34.6 F465 ETSTAT (EtherNet Information Acquisition) ■ Precautions for programming ● Immediately before this instruction, insert F469 (UNITSEL) instruction, and specify the unit (Ethernet communication) and connection No. ● InS1andS2, specify either the starting address of a device that stores string data representing information to be read, or a character constant.
  • Page 989 34.6 F465 ETSTAT (EtherNet Information Acquisition) Storage Number Form S1S2 Name Description destination of words Master unit IP address Deci DtoD+3 Master unit IPv4 address (IPv4) Deci D+4toD+7 Subnet mask (IPv4) Subnet mask Deci S1: “IPv4” D+8toD+11 Default gateway (IPv4) Default gateway “CONNECT”...
  • Page 990 34.6 F465 ETSTAT (EtherNet Information Acquisition) Value Description H00C0 (K192) H00A8 (K168) The master unit IPv4 address is stored. Example) In the case of 192.168.5.30: H0005 (K5) H001E (K30) H00FF (K255) H00FF (K255) The subnet mask is stored. Example) In the case of 255.255.255.0: H00FF (K255) H0000 (K0) H00C0 (K192)

  • Page 991: P466 Ntpcreq (Time Adjustment Request)

    34.7 P466 NTPcREQ (Time Adjustment Request) 34.7 P466 NTPcREQ (Time Adjustment Request) The P466 NTPcREQ instruction can be used with the unit firmware Ver. 1.80 or later. ■ Instruction format R9362 F469 UNITSEL K100 P466 NPTcREQ (Note 1) The figure above shows the case of specifying K1=U100 (Ethernet communication) and S2=K1 (connection No.
  • Page 992 34.7 P466 NTPcREQ (Time Adjustment Request) ● Store the execution result of the time adjustment in the area starting withD. ● Set the time adjustment timeout usingF467 NTPcSV instruction or Ethernet setting>SNTP>Timeout period. If the number of processing times is set to more than one, the next request is started after an elapse of the timeout period + processing intervalS2seconds.
  • Page 993 34.7 P466 NTPcREQ (Time Adjustment Request) ■ Execution result codeD ● In the case of a request error (10 to 15), the time adjustment request set when the instruction is executed is aborted. ● The communication error (20) occurs when no response is returned from the server after time adjustment is requested.
  • Page 994 34.7 P466 NTPcREQ (Time Adjustment Request) When instruction is executed Time is being adjusted. Time adjustment response timeout Value Value Value DT10 HFFFF DT10 HFFFF DT10 DT11 DT11 DT11 Timeout in 41 secondsS1*3+(S2*(S1-1)) seconds ● Total timeout period = 3 seconds × 3 ●...
  • Page 995 34.7 P466 NTPcREQ (Time Adjustment Request) 1) Normal execution Instruction execution Number of processing times (S1) = 2 Number of processing times= 2 Waiting for NTP request 1st request 2nd request processing interval Execution result area H FFFF H0 or H20 or H30 2) Process cancellation while the NTP request is being made Instruction execution Number of processing...
  • Page 996 34.7 P466 NTPcREQ (Time Adjustment Request) ■ Flag operations Name Description Turns ON when the area is exceeded in index modification. R9007 R9008 Set when the unit specified by F469 UNITSEL is not the built-in Ethernet unit. (ER) Set when executed in an interrupt program. 34-30 WUMJ-FP0HPGR-091...

  • Page 997: F467 Ntpcsv (Ntp Destination Server Setting)

    34.8 F467 NTPcSV (NTP Destination Server Setting) 34.8 F467 NTPcSV (NTP Destination Server Setting) The F467 NTPcSV instruction can be used with the unit firmware Ver. 1.80 or later. ■ Instruction format R9341 F469 UNITSEL K100 （ ） “IPv4=192.168.1.1, F467 NTPcSV “DAY0900”...

  • Page 998: Setting Example

    34.8 F467 NTPcSV (NTP Destination Server Setting) ● If the settings have already been made by the Ethernet configuration data, the data becomes invalid. The NTP time acquisition request is executed at the timing specified by this instruction. ● The settings remain valid until the power is turned OFF. Even when the settings are changed by the following operation, they remain valid until the mode is changed from the PROG mode to the RUN mode.
  • Page 999 34.8 F467 NTPcSV (NTP Destination Server Setting) Example 4 "" Settings NTP server (Ipv4): Not change, Time zone: Not change ■ Setting of operandS2 Specify the starting address storing the time acquisition timing setting parameter or a character constant. ● A part of parameters can be omitted. The settings are not changed when parameters are omitted partially.
  • Page 1000 34.8 F467 NTPcSV (NTP Destination Server Setting) Example 3 ",WEEK=01234" Settings Specified time once a day: Not change, Specified day of the week once a week: Once a week on Sunday at 12:34, Specified date and time once a month: Not change Example 4 ",,MONTH=112233"...

Table of Contents